Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
Technical
Reference
Options and Adapters
Volume 1
Revised Edition (April 1984)
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: International Business Machines Corporation
provides this manual "as is," without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied,
including, but not limited to the particular purpose. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this manual at any time.
This product could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
made periodically to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new
editions of the publication.
It is possible that this material may contain reference to, or information about, IBM
products (machines or programs), programming, or services that are not announced in
your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that IBM
intends to announce such IBM products, programming, or services in your country.
Products are not stocked at the address below. Requests for copies of this product and for
technical information about the system should be made to your authorized IBM Personal
Computer dealer.
The following paragraph applies only to the United States and Puerto Rico: A Reader's
Comment Form is provided at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed,
address comments to: IBM Corp., Personal Computer, P.O. Box 1328-C, Boca Raton,
Florida 33432. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligations whatever.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1981, 1982, 1983, 1984
Federal Communications Commission
Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Warning: The equipment described herein has been certified
to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device,
pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC rules. Only
peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals
printers, etc.) certified to comply with the Class B limits may
be attached to the computer. Operation with non-certified
peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and TV
reception. If peripherals not offered by IBM are used with the
equipment, it is suggested to use shielded grounded cables
with in-line filters if necessary.
CAUTION
The product described herein is equipped with a grounded
plug for the user's safety. It is to be used in conjunction with
a properly grounded receptacle to avoid electrical shock.
in
IV
Preface
The options and adapters manual is the second part of the
Technical Reference publication. It is designed to be used in
conjunction with any of the Technical Reference system unit
manuals.
The information in this publication is for reference, and is
intended for hardware and program designers, programmers,
engineers, and anyone else with a knowledge of electronics
and/or programming who needs to understand the design and
operation of the options and adapters available for the IBM
Personal Computer family of products.
This manual is modular in format, with each module providing
information about a specific option or adapter available for the
IBM Personal Computer family of products. Modules having a
large amount of text contain individual indexes.
The modules are grouped by type of device. To find a specific
module:
1 . Locate the full length hard tab with the type of device
(Displays, Printers, Storage Devices, etc.) printed on it that
describes the option or adapter you need information about.
2. Open the book to that section.
3. Leaf through that section to find the proper module.
The front matter of this manual also provides a "System to
Adapter Compatibility Chart," to identify the adapters supported
by each system, and an "Option to Adapter Compatibility
Chart," to identify the options supported by each adapter.
Notes:
VI
System to Adapter Compatibility Chart
The following chart identifies the adapters supported by each
system.
IBM
Personal
Computer
IBM
Personal
Computer
XT
IBM
Portable
Personal
Computer
IBM
Personal
Computer
AT
IBM
Expansion
Unit
64KB Memory
Module Kit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
64/256KB
Memory
Expansion
Option
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
128KB
Memory
Expansion
Option
No
No
No
Yes
No
256KB
Memory
Expansion
Option
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
512KB
Memory
Expansion
Option
No
No
No
Yes
No
Monochrome
Display and
Printer
Adapter
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Color/Graphics
Monitor
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Printer
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
5 1 /4 inch
Diskette Drive
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Fixed Disk
Drive Adapter
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
System to Adapter Compatibility Chart (Part 1 of 2)
August 24, 1984
vu
IBM
Personal
Computer
IBM
Personal
Computer
XT
IBM
Portable
Personal
Computer
IBM
Personal
Computer
AT
IBM
Expansion
Unit
Fixed Disk and
Diskette
Adapter
No
No
No
Yes
No
Asynchronous
Communications
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Serial /Parallel
Adapter
No
No
No
Yes
No
Binary
Synchronous
Communications
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Synchronous
Data Link
Control
(SDLC)
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cluster
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Game Control
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Prototype Card
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Prototype
Adapter
No
No
No
Yes
No
Enhanced
Graphics
Adapter
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Professional
Graphics
Controller
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
G PI B Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data
Acquisition
Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
P C Network
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
System to Adapter Compatibility Chart (Part 2 of 2)
Vlll
August 24, 1984
Option to Adapter Compatibility Chart
Because some adapters perform multiple functions, the following
chart identifies the options supported by each adapter.
CD
>
Q
CO
b
CD
C
E
CO
CD
>
Q
CD
CD
CO
b
T5
CD
■o
(/)
_CD
-Q
D
O
Q
CO
CD
>
Q
3
CO
b
\
<D
>
Q
Q)
co
b
o
CO
Q.
CO
U
-C
CD
X
CD
>
co
b
■o
CD
X
i_i_
CD
>
co
b
TJ
CD
X
Ll
00
o
SB
a.
CO
b
CD
E
o
X
O
o
c
o
CO
a.
b
o
o
(J
c
at
co
u
x
Q.
CO
5
c
at
o
CO
Q.
E
o
u
c
at
o
o
(J
o
CO
o
LL
cc
c
Q_
-C
CO
-J
o
co
o
CO
a
w
b
CO
O
x:
Q.
CO
c5
■D
CD
O
C
CO
SL
C
UJ
>•
JO
Q.
CO
b
co
o
Jc
a
CO
"co
c
o
CO
CO
CD
C)
o
=1
o c
ii
C 3
w to
gs
C0T3
5 1/4"
Diskette Drive
Adapter
X
X
Fixed Disk
Drive Adapter
X
Fixed Disk and
Diskette Drive
Adapter
X
X
X
Color Graphics
Monitor
Adapter
X
X
X
Monochrome
Display and
Printer
Adapter
X
X
X
Printer
Adapter
X
X
Asynchronous
Communications
Adapter
X
Serial/Parallel
Adapter
X
X
X
Game Control
Adapter
X
Enhanced Graphics
Adapter
X
Professional
Graphics
Controller
X
Data Acquisition
and Control
Adapter
X
X - Adapter compatible with Option
Option to Adapter Compatability Chart
August 15, 1984
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
IX
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Expansion Unit
6361468
Contents
Description 1
Expansion Unit Cable 1
Expansion Board 1
Power Supply 3
Extender Card 5
Receiver Card 7
Programming Considerations 9
Interface 11
Specifications 13
Power Supply 14
Extender Card and Receiver Card 15
Logic Diagrams 17
m
IV
Description
The IBM Expansion Unit option enhances the system unit by
adding expansion slots in a separate unit. This option consists of
an extender card, expansion unit cable, and the expansion unit.
The expansion unit contains a power supply, an expansion board,
and a receiver card. This option utilizes one expansion slot in the
system unit to provide seven additional expansion slots in the
expansion unit.
Expansion Unit Cable
The expansion unit cable consists of a 5 6- wire, foil-shielded cable
terminated on each end with a 62-pin D-shell male connector.
Either end of the expansion unit cable can be plugged into the
extender card or the receiver card.
Expansion Board
The expansion board is a support board that carries the I/O
channel signals from the option adapters and receiver card. These
signals, except 'osc,' are carried over the expansion unit cable.
Because 'osc' is not sent over the expansion cable, a
14.31818-MHz signal is generated on the expansion board. This
signal may not be in phase with the 'osc' signal in the system unit.
Decoupling capacitors provided on the expansion board aid in
noise filtering.
Expansion Unit 1
The following is a block diagram of the expansion board.
Expansion
Channel
Slot 1
Slot
2
Slot
3
Slot
4
Slot
5
Slot
6
Slot
7
Slot
8
Power
Supply
Connector
Timing
Generator
(8284)
14.31818
MHz Crystal
Expansion Board Block Diagram
2 Expansion Unit
Power Supply
The expansion unit dc power supply is a 130- watt, 4 voltage-level
switching regulator. It is integrated into the expansion unit and
supplies power for the expansion unit and its options. The dc
output voltages for the power supply are listed in the following
table:
Voltage
Current
Regulation
(Vdc)
(Amps)
(Tolerance)
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
+ %
-%
+ 5.0
2.3
15.0
5
4
-5.0
0.0
0.3
10
8
+ 12.0
0.4
4.2
5
4
-12.0
0.0
0.25
10
9
Vdc Output
All power levels are regulated with overvoltage and overcurrent
protection. The input is fused and is either 120 Vac or 220/240
Vac. If dc overload or overvoltage conditions exist, the supply
automatically shuts down until the condition is corrected. The
supply is designed for continuous operation at 130 watts.
The power supply is located at the right rear of the expansion
unit. It provides two separate connections for power to the fixed
disk drives and supplies operating voltages to the expansion board
through two "keyed" connectors that plug into a 12-pin male
connector on the expansion board.
Vac Output
The receptacle at the rear of the power supply is a nonstandard
connector designed to be used only for the IBM Monochrome
Display. The power supply provides a filtered ac output that is
switched on and off with the main power switch. The maximum
current available at this output is 1 ampere for the 120- volt power
supply and 0.5 amperes for the 220/240-volt power supply.
Expansion Unit 3
Overvoltage and Overcurrent Protection
Voltage Nominal Vac
Type Protection
Rating Amps
110
220
Fuse
Fuse
5
3
Power On/Off Cycle: When the power supply is switched Off
for a minimum of 1.0 second, and then switched On, the 'power
good' signal is regenerated.
The 'power good' signal indicates that there is adequate power to
continue processing. If the power goes below the specified levels,
the 'power good' signal triggers a system shutdown.
This signal is the logical AND of the dc output-voltage 'sense'
signal and the ac input-voltage 'fail' signal. This signal is
TTL-compatible up-level for normal operation or down-level for
fault conditions. The ac 'fail' signal causes 'power good' to go to
a down-level when any output voltage falls below the regulation
limits.
The dc output-voltage 'sense' signal holds the 'power good' signal
at a down level (during power-on) until all output voltages have
reached their respective minimum sense levels. The 'power good'
signal has a turn-on delay of at least 100 ms but no greater than
500 ms.
The sense levels of the dc outputs are shown in the following
table.
Output
Minimum
Sense Voltage Nominal
Maximum
(Vdc)
(Vdc)
(Vdc)
(Vdc)
+ 5
+ 4.5
+ 5.0
+ 5.5
-5
-4.3
-5.0
-5.5
+ 12
+ 10.8
+ 12.0
+ 13.2
-12
-10.2
-12.0
-13.2
4 Expansion Unit
Extender Card
The extender card is a four-plane card. It re-drives the I/O
channel to provide sufficient power to avoid capacitive effects of
the cable. The extender card presents only one load per line of
the I/O channel.
The extender card has a wait-state generator that inserts a wait
state on memory-read and memory-write operations (except
refreshing) for all memory contained in the expansion unit. The
address range for wait-state generation is controlled by switch
settings on the extender card.
The dual-in-line package (DIP) switch on the extender card
should be set to indicate the maximum contiguous read/write
memory in the system unit. The extender card switch settings are
described under "Switch Settings" in the Guide to Operations
manual. Switch positions 1 through 4 correspond to address bits
hex A19 to hex A16.
The DIP-switch settings determine which address segments have a
wait state inserted during memory-read and memory-write
operations. Wait states are required for any memory, including
ROM on option adapters, in the expansion unit. Wait states are
not inserted in the highest segment, hex addresses F0000 to
FFFFF (segment F).
Expansion Unit 5
The following is a block diagram of the extender card.
A0-A19
vzzzzzz
Control Bus
V///J//////77?
Control
Bus
Buffer
w/////s////////////s///////////////m
l/OCH RDY
MEMW,MEMR,DACKO
A16-A19i
Addressfr^
Buffer
m
&
Wait-State
Generator
A9-A0
?
I/O Address
Decode
I
D0-D7
YZZZZZL.
Data
Buffer
2ZZ&ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ2ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ.
77ZZZZ2.
'A
Z^2Z^| Data Latch ^ZZZ2%> j
and Disable
Circuits
EXT DISABLE
>////////////77////////////////////
Jk
>/;///;///
DIR ENABLE
Bus Direction
and Enable
Control
Extender Card Block Diagram
6 Expansion Unit
Receiver Card
The receiver card is a four-plane card that fits in expansion slot 8
of the expansion unit. It re-drives the I/O channel to provide
sufficient power for additional options and to avoid capacitive
effects. Directional control logic is contained on the receiver card
to resolve contention and direct data flow on the I/O channel.
Steering signals are transmitted back through the expansion unit
cable for use on the extender card.
The following is a block diagram of the receiver card.
Control
Control Bus
V///////////A Bu
Buffer
D0-D7
v/////////y///////////yy//////////////A
t
Vzzfy
Bus Direction
and Enable
Control
Data
Buffer
1
Bus V///////////77Z/7//^////////////////ZZ/
VZZZ
rzzzzzzzzzzzzzzfy
A0-A19
V///////////A
Address
Buffer
Data Latch
Circuit
z2
;jW///£>
I/O Address
Decode
V7/A
y Control Signal
Y////////////////////////7777?.
Y/////777?//////////////////////////////
Receiver Card Block Diagram
Expansion Unit 7
8 Expansion Unit
Programming Considerations
Several registers associated with the Expansion Unit option are
programmable and readable for diagnostic test purposes. The
following figures indicate the locations and functions of the
registers on the extender card and receiver card.
Location
Function
Memory FXXXX(*)
Port 210
Port 210
Write to memory to latch address bits
Write to latch expansion bus data (EDO - ED7)
Read to verify expansion bus data (EDO - ED7)
Port 211
Read high-order address bits (A8 - A1 5)
Port 211
Port 21 2
Write to clear wait test latch
Read low-order address bits (AO - A7)
Port 21 3
Write 00 to disable expansion unit
Port 21 3
Port 21 3
Write 01 to enable expansion unit
Read status of expansion unit
DO = enable/disable
D1 = wait-state request flag
D2-D3 = not used
D4-D7 = switch position
1=0ff
= 0n
(*) Example:
Write to memory location F1 23:4 = 00
Read Port 211 = 12
Read Port 21 2 = 34
(All values in
hexadecimal)
Extender Card Registers
Expansion Unit 9
Location
Function
Memory FXXXX(*)
Port 214
Port 214
Port 21 5
Port 21 6
Write to memory to latch address bits
Write to latch data bus bits (DO - D7)
Read data bus bits (DO - D7)
Read high-order address bits (A8 - A1 5)
Read low-order address bits (AO - A7)
(*) Example: Write to memory location F123:4 = 00
Read Port 21 5 = 12
Read Port 216 = 34
(All values in hexadecimal)
Receiver Card Registers
The expansion unit is automatically enabled upon power-up.
Both the extender card and receiver card will be written to, if the
expansion unit is not disabled when writing to FXXXX.
However, the system unit and the expansion unit are read back
separately.
10 Expansion Unit
Interface
All signals found on the system unit's I/O channel will be
provided to expansion slots in the expansion unit, with the
exception of the 'osc' signal and the system unit's power supply
voltages.
A 'ready' line on the expansion channel makes it possible to
operate with slow I/O or memory devices. If the channel's I/O
'ch rdy' line is not activated by an addressed device, all
microprocessor-generated memory cycles take five
microprocessor clock cycles per byte for memory in the expansion
unit.
The following table contains a list of all the signals that are
re-driven by the extender and receiver cards, and their associated
time delays. The delay times include the delay due to signal
propagation in the expansion unit cable. Assume a nominal cable
delay of 3 ns. As such, device access will be less than 260 ns.
Nominal
Maximum
Delay
Delay
Signal
(ns)
(ns)
Direction (*)
AO-A19
27
39
Out
AEN
27
39
Out
DACKO - DACK3
27
39
Out
MEMR
27
39
Out
MEMW
51
75
Out
IOR
51
75
Out
IOW
27
39
Out
ALE
27
39
Out
CLK
27
39
Out
T/C
27
39
Out
RESET
27
39
Out
IRQ2-IRQ7
36
(**)
In
DRQ1 -DRQ3
36
(**)
In
I/O CH RDY
36
51
In
I/O CH CK
36
51
In
DO - D7 (Read)
84
133
In
DO - D7 (Write)
19
27
Out
(*) With resepct to the system unit.
(* *) Asynchronous nature of interrupts and other requests ar
e more dependent on
microprocessor recognition than electrical signal propag
ation through
expansion logic.
Expansion Unit 11
12 Expansion Unit
Specifications
Size
Height
Width
Depth
142 mm (5.5 in.)
500 mm (19.6 in.)
410 mm (16.1 in.)
Weight
14.9 kg (33 lb)
Power Cable
Length
Size
1.83 m (6 ft)
18AWG
Signal Cable
Length
Size
1 m (3.28 ft)
22AWG
Physical Specifications
Voltage (Vac)
Frequency
(Hz)
Current (Amps)
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
±3 Hz
Maximum
110
90
137
60
3 at 90 Vac
220/240
180
259
50
1.6 at 180 Vac
Input Requirements
Environment
Air Temperature
System On
System Off
Humidity
System On
System Off
Heat Output
15.6to32.2°C(60to90°F)
10to43°C(50to110°F)
8 to 80%
20 to 80%
717 BTU/hr
Additional Specifications
Expansion Unit 13
I
s
I
£
"0
o
S
CD
-t
CO
c
<
3
a
O
o
3
3
CD
O
i-+
O
Fixed Disk Drive
Power Connector
Power On/Off
Expansion Unit
Power Connector
Expansion
Board
Power Connectors
4 f + 5 Vdc
3, Ground
2, Ground
1, +12 Vdc
4, +5 Vdc
3, Ground
2, Ground
1, +12 Vdc
6 f + 5 Vdc
5, + 5 Vdc
4, + 5 Vdc
3, -5 Vdc
2, Ground
1, Ground
6, Ground
5 r Ground
4, -12 Vdc
3, +12 Vdc
2, Key
1 f PwrGood
H
tr
a>
o
CD
5'
o
o
cjq'
o
p
cT
o
p
5"
W3
o
3
i
s
IBM Monochrome Display
Power Connector
Extender Card and Receiver Card
The extender card and receiver card rear-panel connectors are the
same. Pin and signal assignments for the extender and receiver
cards are shown below.
><| /f(2\ « a « «
• <§> "^1
1 I (( \&) • • • •
• • (2) // 9 9
42 \\ <»•••«
• ® A
62 ^ ® # * * *
• ® J/43
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
+ EIRQ6
22
+ ED5
43
+ EIRQ7
2
+ EDRQ2
23
+ EDRQ1
44
+ ED6
3
+ EDIR
24
+ EDRQ3
45
+ EI/0CHRDY
4
+ E ENABLE
25
RESERVED
46
+ EIRQ3
5
+ ECLK
26
+ EALE
47
+ ED7
6
-E MEM IN EXP
27
+ ET/C
48
+ ED1
7
+ EA17
28
+ E RESET
49
-EI/0CHCK
8
+ EA16
29
9
+ EA5
30
+ EA19
51
+ ED0
10
- E DACK0
31
11
+ EA15
32
12
+ EA11
33
+ EA18
54
+ EIRQ5
13
+ EA10
34
-EMEMR
55
+ EIRQ4
14
+ EA9
35
-EMEMW
56
+ ED3
15
+ EA1
36
+ EA0
57
GND
16
+ EA3
37
-EDACK3
58
GND
17
-EDACK1
38
+ EA6
59
GND
18
+ EA4
39
-EIOR
60
GND
19
-EDACK2
40
+ EA8
61
GND
20
-EI0W
41
+ EA2
62
GND
21
+ EA13
42
+ EA7
E = Extended
Connector Specifications
Expansion Unit 15
16 Expansion Unit
I
s
5'
D
c
3.
o
era
era
Expansion Board (Sheet 1 of 1)
00
I
©
9
d
3.
ISHT 3)
|SHT 3]
(SHT 3)
ISHT 3)
ISHT 3)
(SHT 3)
ISHT 31
ISHT 3|
[SHT 31
ISHT 31
(SHT 3)
~P
»
AEN -
OaTko-
ISHT 2) MEM.IN EXP -
~"5Je
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
ISHT 2)
LS04
(SHT 3) DO
[SHT 3) Dl
(SHT 3) D2
(SHT 3) D3
(SHT 3| D4
(SHT 31 D5
(SHT 3) D6
(SHT 3) D7
[SHT 2) DIR TO CPU
(SHT 2) DATA BUS ENABLE—
TT " 10" 9 J
• :4.7Kn
r///////.^
Extender Card (Sheet 1 of 3)
5*
c
5.
[SHT DREA D STATUS -
(SHT 1) P ORT 211 -
ISHT3.1) DACKO-
(SHT 3|
(SHT 3|
(SHT 3|
(SHT 3)
1A 1Y
u
H
ET ?T>oL
"HJ
(SHT 3|
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3]
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3]
(SHT1)
LOCAL 01
(SHT 3) EJ/
[SHT 3] E I/O CH CK—
(SHT 3) ERESERVEO—
(SHT 3] EDRQ1 —
(SHT 3) EDRQ2-
|SHT3] EDRQ3 —
MEfflW—
(SHT l| EXTOISABLE-
H
+ 5VO-*-li D p « Q
I CLR Q — N.C.
g L5i««
•""in
13h > — 12
, 2 S08 r
^C^ '
rr
n
1
iurm
(SHT 3) EIRQ2 —
(SHT 3] EIRQ3-
(SHT3) EIRQ4 —
(SHT 31 EIRQ5-
ISHT3I EIR0 6-
(SHT3| EIRQ7 —
— 0+5V
8.2K DIP R-PAC
n
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3|
(SHT 3)
[SHT I)
(SHT 3)
(SHT 1|
(SHT 3|
(SHT 3|
(SHT 3)
-DATA BUS ENABLE (SHT 1 1
(SHT 31
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3)
(SHT 3(
— PMEMW
-PlM
-EJPJ
— EMEMW
(SHT 3|
(SHT 31
[SHT 31
(SHT 3|
(SHT 31
ISHT 31
Extender Card (Sheet 2 of 3)
Si
o
W
o
C
3
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
l/OCHCK
l/OCHRDY
(SHT 2)
RESERVED
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
IRQ2
IRQ3
[SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
IRQ4
IRQS
IRQ6
IRQ7
(SHT 2]
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2]
DRQ1
DRQ2
0RQ3
J+l OmJ_.047JLo47 J_.047J_.O47J_-O47_J_.O47J_.04
C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 Ci
-AEN
(SHT 1]
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
[SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
- _OR_ (SHT 1]
- IOW_ (SHT 2]
- MEMR (SHT 1.2)
- MEMW (SHT 2)
- CLK (SHT 2)
- T/C (SHT 1)
-RESET (SHT 2)
(SHT 2.1)
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
[SHT 2)
[SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT I)
(SHT 1)
(SHT I)
(SHT 1)
(SHT1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT I)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
[SHT 11
(SHT1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 1)
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2.1)
(SHT 2.1)
(SHT 2]
(SHT 1|
(SHT 2)
(SHT1)
[SHT 2)
EAEN-
EA19-
EA18-
EA17-
EA16-
EA15-
EA14-
EA13-
EA12-
EA11 -
EAIO-
EAO-
EDACKO -
EOACK1 -
_______
E0ACK3 -
EMEMW -
EWEMR -
EIOW -
EIOR -
EALE-
ECLK-
ET/C -
E RESET -
O-SHELL TYPE
CONNECTOR
CARD EDGE TABS
E07
(SHT 2.1]
E06
(SHT 2.11
ED5
(SHT 2.11
E04
(SHT 2.1]
ED3
(SHT 1]
ED2
(SHT 1|
EDI
(SHT 2.1)
EDO
(SHT 1)
EIRQ2
(SHT 2)
EIRQ3
[SHT 2)
EIRQ4
(SHT 2)
(SHT 2)
[SHT 2)
EIRQ6
EIRQ7
(SHT 2)
El/O CH RDY (SHT 2)
-El/O CH CK
(SHT 2)
E RESERVED (SHT 2)
EDRQ1
(SHT 2)
-EDRQ2
(SHT 2)
E0RQ3
(SHT 2)
EDlR
(SHT 2)
E ENABLE
(SHT 2)
-E.MEM.IN EXP.[SHT1)
Extender Card (Sheet 3 of 3)
§
©'
3
d
B.
Receiver Card (Sheet 1 of 3)
I
9
©*
9
g
Receiver Card (Sheet 2 of 3)
P-SHELL CONNECTOR
I
e
%
C
S.
EDIB
E ENABLE
ECLK
E. MEM. IN EXT 121
IV!!!
EALE
eTTE ii
EDI (2)
E I/flCHCK n
EIBQ 2 II
UBD2HI
_JD0(2)
ED2 121
|2) DIR TO CPU
121 ENABLE
Receiver Card (Sheet 3 of 3)
Notes:
24 Expansion Unit
Notes
August 15, 1984
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Monochrome
Display
6361474
Contents
Description 1
Specifications 3
Logic Diagrams 5
ill
IV
Description
The high resolution IBM Monochrome Display connects to the
system unit through two cables. One cable is a signal cable from
the display adapter to the display, and the other provides power to
the display from the system unit. This arrangement eliminates the
need for a wall outlet and allows the system-unit Power switch to
control power to the display. The display unit has a 28.3 cm
(11.5 in.) diagonal, 90° deflection cathode ray tube (CRT). The
display may be placed on the system unit or on a nearby table or
desk. Brightness and contrast controls are on the front surface
and are easily accessible to the operator.
The characteristics of the display are as follows:
• Screen
- High-persistence, green phosphor (P39).
- Etched surface to reduce glare.
- Presentation of 80 characters wide by 25 rows deep.
- Characters are defined in a 14 PEL-high by 9 PEL- wide
matrix.
• Video Signal
- Maximum bandwidth of 16.257 MHz at -3dB
• Vertical Drive
- Screen refreshed at 50 Hz with 350 lines of vertical
resolution and 720 lines of horizontal resolution
• Horizontal Drive
- Positive level, TTL-compatibility, at a frequency of 18.432
kHz
Monochrome Display 1
2 Monochrome Display
Specifications
Size
Height
Length
Depth
280 mm (11 in.)
380 mm (14.9 in.)
350 mm (13.7 in.)
Weight
7.9 kg (17.3 lb)
Heat Output
325 BTU/hr
Power Cable
Length
Size
0.914 m (3 ft)
18AWG
Signal Cable
Length
Size
1.22 m (4 ft)
22AWG
Physical Specifications
Monochrome Display 3
4 Monochrome Display
Logic Diagrams
The IBM Monochrome Display has two models: a 1 10- Vac
model and a 220/240-Vac model. A logic diagram for each
follows.
Monochrome Display 5
o
©
3
t
ST
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
UP TO 450 VOLTS EXIST
ON THE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
MOTES:
1. RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN {OHM) K = 1000O M = l.OOO.OOOD
2. ALL RESISTOR ARE 1/4W EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED.
3. ALL CAPACITORS ARE 50V EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED.
4. CAPACITORS VALUES ARE uf UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED u = ff = 10".
5. AC WIRING INFORMATION
PHASE = BLACK/BROWN WIRE
NEUTRAL = WHITE/BLUE WIRE
GROUND = GREEN AND YELLOW WIRE
IMPORTANT: THE PHASE WIRE MUST GO TO THE FUSED SIDE OF TRANSFORMER.
110Vac Monochrome Display (Sheet 1 of 1)
ST
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
UP TO 450 VOLTS EXIST
ON THE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
NOTES:
1. RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN (OHM) OK = I000Q M = 1.000.0000
2. ALL RESISTOR ARE 1/4W EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED.
3. ALL CAPACITORS ARE 50V EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED.
4. CAPACITORS VALUES ARE ^UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED /i= ^= 10".
5. AC WIRING INFORMATION
PHASE = BLACK/BROWN WIRE
NEUTRAL = WHITE/BLUE WIRE
GROUND = GREEN AND YELLOW WIRE
IMPORTANT: THE PHASE WIRE MUST SO TO THE FUSED SIDE OF TRANSFORMER.
220/240Vac Monochrome Display (Sheet 1 of 1)
Notes:
8 Monochrome Display
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Portable Personal
Computer Display
6361472
Contents
Description 1
Logic Diagram 3
111
IV
Description
The IBM Portable Personal Computer Display attaches internally
to the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter in the system unit and to
the power supply. A cable provides the composite drive signals
from the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter to the display.
Another cable provides dc power to the display from the power
supply.
The IBM Portable Personal Computer Display is designed to
blank out the color-burst signal generated by the Color/Graphics
Monitor Adapter. Blanking keeps the color-burst signal from
appearing on the composite video screen.
The display is a 228.6 mm (9 in.), amber cathode ray tube
(CRT). Brightness and Contrast controls on the front panel are
easily accessible.
The characteristics of the display are as follows:
Screen
• Medium-persistence, amber phosphor (LA)
• Etched surface to reduce glare
• 80-character by 25-line image
• Characters are defined in a 8 PEL-high by 8 PEL-wide
matrix
Composite Video Signal
• 1.5 Vdc (peak to peak)
• 60 Hz refresh rate
• 15.75 kHz horizontal scan rate
IBM Portable Personal Computer Display 1
2 IBM Portable Personal Computer Display
Logic Diagrams
The following pages contain the logic diagrams for the IBM
Portable Personal Computer Display.
IBM Portable Personal Computer Display 3
Portable Personal Computer Display (Sheet 1 of 2)
4 IBM Portable Personal Computer Display
Portable Personal Computer Display (Sheet 2 of 2)
IBM Portable Personal Computer Display 5
Notes:
6 IBM Portable Personal Computer Display
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Color Display
6361470
Contents
Description 1
Specifications 3
Logic Diagram 5
ill
IV
Description
The IBM Color Display connects to the system unit with a signal
cable of approximately 1.5 meters (5 feet) in length. This signal
cable is a direct-drive interface from the Color/Graphics Monitor
Adapter.
A second cable provides power to the display from an electrical
outlet. The display unit has its own power control and indicator
and will accept either 120-volt 60-Hz or 220-volt 50-Hz power.
The power supply in the display automatically switches to match
the applied power.
The display has a 340-millimeter (13-inch) CRT. The display
may be placed on the system unit or on a nearby table or desk.
The front panel of the display has a Power-On control, Power-On
indicator, Brightness control, and Contrast control. The rear
panel has the Vertical Hold and Vertical Size controls.
The characteristics of the IBM Color Display are as follows:
• Screen
- High contrast (black).
- Displays up to 16 colors when used with the IBM
Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter.
- Presentation of 80 characters wide by 25 rows deep.
- Characters are defined in an 8 PEL-high by 8 PEL- wide
matrix.
• Video Signal
- Red, green, and blue signals, and intensity are
independent.
Color Display 1
Vertical Drive
- Positive synchronous, TTL-compatible
- Frequency 50/60 Hz
- Non-interlaced operation
Horizontal Drive
- Positive-level, TTL compatibility, at a frequency of 15.75
kHz.
2 Color Display
Specifications
Size
Height
Length
Depth
297 mm (11.7 in.)
392 mm (15.4 in.)
407 mm (15.6 in.)
Weight
11.8 kg (26 lb)
Heat Output
240 BTU/hr
Power Cable
Length
Size
1.83 m (6 ft)
18AWG
Signal Cable
Length
Size
1.5 m (5 ft)
22AWG
Physical Specifications
Color Display 3
4 Color Display
Logic Diagram
The following pages contain the logic diagram for the IBM Color
Display.
Color Display 5
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
UP TO 450 VOLTS EXIST
ON THE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
» S 4 ' «c
^^©aJ
mm
1S2078
40 Vs»e~- ~~j
0534
2SAM4C
W
^hbti
Q666
ISAW4S
OOQ OH HAI7805P L, KB?»*.J
HnT X • ' ■ ' «««• ftM3 T r\ C
_,_C212 X
-X 100/50
Color Display (Sheet 1 of 1)
6 Color Display
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
UP TO 450 VOLTS EXIST
ON THE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
PWB-673
Color Display 7
Notes:
8 Color Display
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Enhanced Color
Display
Contents
Description 1
Operating Characteristics 2
Specifications 5
Connector Information 6
VI
Description
The IBM Enhanced Color Display is an advanced color display
capable of operating in two separate modes. Mode 1 is a 16 color
640 by 200 overscan mode with a horizontal scan frequency of
15.75 kHz. Mode 2 is a 64 color 640 by 350 mode with a
horizontal scan frequency of 21.8 kHz. Both modes are
non-interlaced. The monitor determines which mode to operate in
by decoding the vertical sync polarity.
The IBM Enhanced Color Display attaches to the system unit by
a signal cable that is approximately 3.5 feet (1.07 meters) in
length. This signal cable provides a direct-drive interface from
the IBM Personal Computer.
A second cable provides ac power to the display from a standard
wall outlet. The display has its own power control and indicator.
Three models are provided. Model 001 is for northern hemisphere
operation and operates on 120 volts 50/60 Hz. Model 002 is for
northern hemisphere operation and operates on 220/240 volts
50/60 Hz. Model 003 is for southern hemisphere operation and
operates on 220/240 volts 50/60 Hz.
The display has a 13-inch, high-contrast CRT. The CRT and
analog circuits are packaged in an enclosure so the display may sit
either on top of the system unit or on a nearby tabletop or desk.
Front panel controls and indicators include: Power-On control,
Power-On indicator, Brightness and Contrast controls.
Additional controls on the rear of the display are: Vertical Size 1
and Vertical Size 2. There are two service controls on the rear of
the unit, black level adjustment and contrast default value
adjustment.
August 2, 1984 IBM Enhanced Color Display 1
Operating Characteristics
Screen
• Etched anti-glare screen
• 0.31mm dot mask
• Displays 16 or 64 colors depending on the mode selected
User Controls
• Brightness control affects the contribution of all input bits by
controlling the gain of the video stages. The display contains
a protection circuit which may overide this control.
• Contrast control affects the contribution of the least
significant bits only. When pushed in, the contrast control is
rendered inoperative and contrast is determined by the
setting of the contrast default value adjustment on the rear of
the display. Pulling the contrast control knob out engages the
front contrast control.
• V. Size 1 control controls the vertical size of the screen in
mode 1.
• V. Size 2 control controls the vertical size of the screen in
mode 2.
Service Controls
• Black level adjust control is adjusted to make the raster lines
just disappear when black input signal is supplied.
• Contrast default value control is used to set the contrast
value when the front contrast control is pushed in. Normally
adjust for best brown color.
2 IBM Enhanced Color Display August 2, 1984
Vertical Sync
• Uses polarity of Vertical Sync signal to automatically select
Mode 1 or Mode 2 operation. Mode 1 is selected by a
normally low positive going TTL pulse. Mode 2 is selected by
a normally high negative going TTL pulse.
• Screen may be refreshed from 50 to 60 Hz. At 60 Hz there
are either 200 or 350 vertical lines of resolution depending
on the mode selected.
• 700 /xsec retrace time
Horizontal Sync
• Normally low, positive going TTL pulse
• In Mode 1, 15.75 kHz.
• In Mode 2, 21.8 kHz.
• 6 /xsec retrace time
August 2, 1984 IBM Enhanced Color Display 3
When operating in Mode 1, the display maps the 4 input bits into
16 of the possible 64 colors as shown in the following chart.
1 R
G
B
Color
Rr
Gg
Bb
Black
00
00
00
1
Blue
00
00
1
1
Green
00
1
00
1
1
Cyan
00
1
1
1
Red
1
00
00
1
1
Magenta
1
00
1
1
1
Brown
1
01
00
1
1
1
Gray 1
1
1
1
1
Gray 2
01
01
01
1
1
Light Blue
01
01
1 1
1
1
Light Green
01
1 1
01
1
1
1
Light Cyan
01
1 1
1 1
1 1
Light Red
1 1
01
01
1 1
1
Light Magenta
1 1
01
1 1
1 1
1
Light Yellow
1 1
1 1
01
1 1
1
1
White
1 1
1 1
1 1
Note: The R G and B are the most significant bits. The r g
and b are the least significant bits.
4 IBM Enhanced Color Display
August 2, 1984
Specifications
Size:
Length - 15.4 in (392 mm)
Depth- 15.6 in (407 mm)
Height- 11.7 in (297 mm)
Weight:
32 lbs
Heat Output:
300 BTU/hr
Power Cable:
Length -6 ft (1.83 m)
Size - 18 AWG
Signal Cable:
Length -3.5 ft (1.07 m)
August 2, 1984 IBM Enhanced Color Display 5
Connector Information
The signals that are on the pins vary with the driver card being
used and the mode in which it is operating. All signals are
expected to be TTL levels supplied by totem pole drivers.
Pin
Model (16 Color)
Mode 2 (64 Color)
1
Shield Gnd
Ground
2
Signal Gnd
r
3
Red
R
4
Green
G
5
Blue
B
6
Intensity
a
7
Unused
b
8
Horiz Sync
Horiz Sync
9
Vert Sync
Vert Sync
Note: The R G and B are the most significant bits. The r g
and b are the least significant bits.
6 IBM Enhanced Color Display
August 2, 1984
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer
Professional Graphics
Display Technical
Reference
6138159
August 15,1984
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Contents
Description 1
Operating Characteristics 2
Specifications 3
Logic Diagrams 5
August 15, 1984
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1984 Ui
August 15, 1984
iv © Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Description
The IBM Personal Computer Professional Graphics Display is a
640-by-480 PEL color raster display for medium- and
high-function graphics and alphanumerics. It operates with
separate red, green, and blue analog signals and is can support an
infinite number of colors.
The Professional Graphics Display attaches to the system unit
through a signal cable that is approximately 1.5 meters (4.9 feet)
in length. This cable provides a direct-drive connection from the
IBM Professional Graphics Controller. The cable consists of
shielded, twisted-pair lines, and has a 9-pin, subminiature, D-shell
connector at the system-unit end. The pins have the following
functions:
Signal Name/Description
Pin
Red Video
1
Green Video
2
Blue Video
3
Professional
Horizontal and Vertical Sync
4
Professional
Graphics
Mode Control
5
Graphics
Display
Ground for Pin 1
6
Controller
Ground for Pin 2
7
Ground for Pin 3
8
Ground for Pins 4 and 5
9
A second cable provides power to the display from a standard
wall outlet. The display has its own power control and indicator.
Depending on the model number, it accepts either 100 to 127 Vac
at 50 to 60 Hz, or 200 to 240 Vac at 50 to 60 Hz.
The display has a 340-millimeter (13-inch) cathode ray tube
(CRT). The CRT and analog circuits are enclosed so the display
may be placed on top of the system unit or on a nearby tabletop
or desk. Front-panel controls and indicators are the Power-On
indicator, Power-On control, and Contrast and Brightness
controls.
August 15, 1984
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Professional Graphics Display 1
Operating Characteristics
Screen
• High-contrast, antireflection
• Displays an infinite number of colors
640 horizontal PELs by 480 vertical PELs
Video Signal
• Maximum video bandwidth of 1 7 MHz
• Red, green, blue, and synchronization signals are all
independent
Synchronization
• Active low, TTL-compatible, at frequencies of 30.12
kHz horizontal, and 60.02 kHz vertical (non-interlaced)
Mode Control
• Active low
• Expands the screen capacity to 400 lines.
August 15, 1984
2 Professional Graphics Display © Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Specifications
Size:
Length: 392 mm (15.4 in.)
Depth: 407 mm (15.6 in.)
Height: 297 mm (11.7 in.)
Weight: 14.5 kg (32 lb)
Power Dissipation:
87 Watts Maximum
Power Cable:
Length: 1.8 m (6 ft)
Size: 18AWG
Signal Cable:
Length: 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
Size: 28 AWG
August 15, 1984
© Copyright ibm Corporation 1984 Professional Graphics Display 3
Notes:
August 15, 1984
4 Prof essional Graphics Display © Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Logic Diagrams
The following are the logic diagrams of the Professional Graphics
Display:
0)
JC
CO
August 15, 1984
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Professional Graphics Display 5
7
©
©'
o
E
o
09
®
o
o
T3
w >
s Si
£ Ui
h- so
(X ^P
B(SHT3)
C(SHT3)
D(SHT3)
~E(SHT3)
— F(SHT3)
-j— G(SHT3)
LSMAO^
H (SHT3)
Sheet 2 of 5
®>
p
J-
•a
c
v;
</>
-i
<-►
era
H^
«"*■
Ol
CO
X
n
00
o
-^
-a
o
p
o
D
5
O
©'
9
E
o
-8
(SHT2) B
(SHT2)C
(SHT2) D
(SHT2) E
(SHT2) F
iSHT 2) G
(SHT2) H
-M(SHT5)
-N (SHT5)
-0{SHT5)
P(SHT5)
Q(SHT5)
R (SHT5)
Sheet 3 of 5
8 Professional Graphics Display
August 15, 1984
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
(SHT3) M
(SHT3)N
(SHT3)0
(SHT3)P
(SHT3)Q
(SHT3) R
(SHT4) K
(SHT4) L
Sheet 5 of 5
August 15, 1984
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Professional Graphics Display 9
August 15, 1984
10 Professional Graphics Display © Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Graphics Printer
6361480
ii
Contents
Description 1
Programming Considerations 3
Printer Control Codes . . , 3
Printer Control Code Quick Reference 13
Print Mode Combinations . , 16
Graphics Printer Character Set 17
DIP-Switch Settings .-, 22
Interface 25
Specifications 27
Connector Pin Assignments 29
Logic Diagrams 33
iii
IV
Description
The IBM Graphics Printer is a self -powered, stand-alone,
tabletop unit. It prints in two directions at 80 characters per
second (cps).
A 9-wire print head is used to print characters in a 9-by-9 dot
matrix. The IBM Graphics Printer can print in a compressed
mode of 132 characters per line, in a standard mode of 80
characters per line, in a double-width compressed mode of 66
characters per line, and in a double-width mode of 40 characters
per line. The printer can print double-size characters and
double-strike characters.
Besides printing the standard ASCII 96-character uppercase and
lowercase character sets, the IBM Graphics Printer has additional
capabilities including: an extended character set for international
languages, subscript, superscript, an underline mode, and
programmable graphics. It can also accept commands setting the
line-feed control desired for the application.
The printer unit obtains ac power from a standard 120- Vac wall
outlet. A 220-Vac model and a 240- Vac model are also available.
A 1.83 m (6 ft) signal cable connects the printer to the system
unit's Printer Adapter or combination Monochrome Display and
Printer Adapter. The cable is a 25 -lead shielded cable with a
25-pin D-shell connector at the system unit end, and a 36-pin
connector at the printer end.
Graphics Printer 1
2 Graphics Printer
Programming Considerations
Printer Control Codes
On the following pages you will find codes for printer characters,
controls, and graphics. You may want to keep them handy for
future reference. The examples given in the "Printer Function"
descriptions are written in the BASIC language. The "Input"
description is given when more information is needed for
programming considerations.
ASCII decimal values for the printer control codes can be found
under "Graphics Printer Character Set."
The descriptions that follow assume that the printer dual-in-line
package (DIP) switches have not been changed from their factory
settings.
Graphics; Printer 3
Printer
Code
Printer Function
BEL
CAN
CR
DC2
DC4
ESC
Bell
Sounds the printer buzzer for 1 second.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(7);
Cancel
Clears the printer buffer. Control codes, except SO, remain
in effect.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(24);
Carriage Return
Ends the line that the printer is on and prints the data
remaining in the printer buffer. (No Line Feed operation
takes place.)
Note: IBM Personal Computer BASIC adds a Line Feed
unless CHR$(128) is added; for example, CHR$(141).
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(13);
Device Control 2 (Compressed Off)
Cancels the Compressed print mode.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(18);
Device Control 4 (Double Width Off)
Cancels the Double Width print mode.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(20);
Escape
Signals the printer that the next data sent
is a printer command.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);
4 Graphics Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC A Escape A (Sets Variable Line Feeding)
Format: ESCA;n;
Escape A sets the line-feed to n/72 inch. The example that
follows sets line feeding to 24/72 inch. ESC 2 must be sent
to the printer before the line feeding will change. For
example, ESC A;24 (text) ESC 2 (text). The text following
ESC A;24 will be at the previously set line-feed increment.
The text following ESC 2 will be printed with the new
line-feed increment of 24/72 inch. Any increment between
1 /72 and 85/72 may be used.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(65);CHR$(24); CHR$(27);CHR$(50);
Note: How to enter "n": When "n"
is actually transferred to the printer as data, it is
transferred in the form of a 7-bit binary number. In
the case of "ESC A+24," actual output to the
printer is performed as <1 B>H<41 >H<1 8>H in
hexadecimal code.
ESC C Escape C (Set Lines per Page)
Format:ESC C;n;
Sets the page length. ESC C command must be followed by
a value to specify the length of page desired. (Maximum
form length for the printer is 1 27 lines.) The example
below sets the page length to 55 lines. The printer
defaults to 66 lines per page when powered on or reset.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67); CHR$(55);
Escape C (Set Inches per Page)
Format:ESC C;n;m;
Escape C sets the length of the page in inches (one inch is
25.4 millimeters). This command requires a value of
(zero) for n, and a value between 1 and 22 for m.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67);CHR$(0); CHR$(12);
ESC D Escape D (Set Horizontal Tab Stops)
Format: ESC D;n 1 ;n 2 ;...n k ;NUL;
Sets the horizontal tab stop positions. The example that
follows sets the horizontal tab stop positions at printer
columns 10, 20, and 40. They are followed by CHR$(0), the
Null code. They must be given in ascending numeric order.
Tab stops can be set between 1 and 80. When the printer is
in the Compressed print mode, tab stops can be set up to
132. The Graphics Printer can have a maximum of 28 tab stops.
The HT Code (CHR$(9)) is used to execute a tab operation.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(68);CHR$(10);
CHR$(20);CHR$(40);CHR$(0);
Graphics Printer 5
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCE
ESCF
ESCG
ESCH
ESC J
Escape E (Emphasized)
Sets the printer to the Emphasized print mode. The speed of
the printer is reduced to half speed during the Emphasized
print mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(69);
Escape F (Emphasized Off)
Cancels the Emphasized print mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(70);
Escape G (Double Strike)
Sets the printer to the Double Strike print mode. The paper
is spaced 1 /216 inch before the second pass of the
print head.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(71);
Escape H (Double Strike Off)
Cancels the Double Strike mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(72);
Escape J (Sets Variable Line Feeding)
Format: ESCJ;n;
When ESC J is sent to the printer, the paper will advance in
increments of n/216 inch. The value of n must be between 1
and 255. The example that follows sets the line feed to
50/216 inch. ESC J is canceled after the line feed takes
place.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(74);CHR$(50);
6 Graphics Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCK
Escape K (480 Bit-Image Graphics Mode)
FormatESC K;n-| ;ri2;vi ;v2,'...V|<;
Changes from the Text mode to the 480 Bit- Image Graphics
mode, n-j and n£ are one byte each, and together specify
the number of bit- image data bytes (|<) to be transferred, v-j
through v^ are the bytes of the bit- image data. The number
of bit-image data bytes y is equal to nj + 256n2 and
cannot exceed 480 bytes. At every horizontal position, each
byte can print up to 8 vertical dots. The least significant
bit of the byte corresponds to the bottom dot; the most
significant bit of the byte corresponds to the top dot.
Bit-image data may be mixed with text data on the same line.
Note: Assign values to n-j and n2 as follows:
n-j represents values from through 255.
n2 represents the values of either or 1 with a weight of 256.
The (z)s in the following description of n-j and n2
can be either 1's or 0's.
n 2
z
215 2 14 2 13 2 12 2 11 2 10 2 9 2 8
zzzzzzzz
2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2°
Graphics Printer 7
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCK
Cont.
Data sent to the printer.
Data A
ESC K
ni
n 2
Data B
DataC
ESC
K
"1
n 2
DataD
Text
Data
Length
Bit-
Text
Length
of bit
image
data
of bit
image
data
image
data
Vi"V k
data
Bit-
image
data
-480 bit-image positions-
Note: Assume a total of 20 characters of text data (data
A and data C). In Text mode, 20 characters correspond
to 120 bit-image positions (20 x 6 = 120). The
printable portion left for Bit- Image Graphics
data (data B and data D) is 360 bit-image
positions (480 - 120 = 360).
Example:
1 'OPEN PRINTER IN RANDOM MODE WITH LENGTH
OF 255
2 WIDTH "LPT1:",255
3 OPEN "LPT1 :" AS #1
4 PRINT #1,CHR$(13);CHR$(10);
5 SLASH$=CHR$(1)+CHR$(02)+ CHR$(04)+CHR$(08)
6SLASH$=SLASH$+CHR$(16)+CHR$(32)+
CHR$(64)+CHR$(128)+CHR$(0)
7 GAP$=CHR$(0)+CHR$(0)+CHR$(0)
8 NDOTS=480
9'ESCKN1 N2
10PRINT#1,CHR$(27);"K";CHR$(NDOTSMOD256);
CHR$(FIX(NDOTS/256));
1 1 'SEND NDOTS NUMBER OF BIT IMAGE BYTES
12 FOR 1=1 TO NDOTS/12 'NUMBER OF SLASHES TO PRINT
USING GRAPHICS
13 PRINT #1,SLASH$;GAP$;
14 NEXT I
15 CLOSE
16 END
This example will give you a row of slashes
printed in the Bit- Image Graphics mode.
8 Graphics Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC L Escape L (960 Bit-Image Graphics Mode)
Format: ESC L;ni;n2;v<i;v2;...V| c ;
Changes from the Text mode to the 960 Bit- Image Graphics
mode. The input is similar to ESC K. The 960 Bit- Image
Graphics mode prints at half the speed of the 480 Bit- Image
Graphics mode, but can produce a denser graphic image. The
number of bytes of bit-image data (|<) is n-j + 256n2
but cannot exceed 960. n<| is in the range of to 255.
ESC IM Escape N (Set Skip Perforation)
Format ESC N;n;
Sets the Skip Perforation function. The number following
ESC N sets the value for the number of lines of Skip
Perforation. The example shows a 12-line skip. This will
print 54 lines and advance the paper 12 lines. The value of n
must be between 1 and 127. ESC N must be reset anytime the
page length (ESC C) is changed.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(78);CHR$(12);
ESC O Escape O (Cancel Skip Perforation)
Cancels the Skip Perforation function.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(79);
ESC S Escape S (Subscript/Superscript)
Format: ESC S;n;
Sets the printer to the Subscript print mode when ESC S is
followed by a 1, as in the example that follows. When ESC S
is followed by a (zero), the printer will print in the
Superscript print mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(83);CHR$(1);
ESC T Escape T (Subscript/Superscript Off)
Cancels printing in the Subscript or Superscript print mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(84);
ESC U Escape U (Unidirectional Printing)
Format: ESC U;n;
The printer will print from left to right when ESC U is
followed by a 1 . When ESC U is followed by a (zero), the
left to right printing operation is canceled. The
unidirectional printing (ESC U) ensures a more accurate
print-start position for better print quality.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(85);CHR$(1 );
Graphics Printer 9
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCW
ESCY
ESCZ
ESCO
ESC1
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC 6
Escape W (Double Width)
Format: ESCW;n;
Sets the printer to the Double Width print mode when ESC W is
followed by a 1. This mode must be canceled with ESC W
followed by a (zero)
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(87);CHR$(1);
Escape Y (960 Bit-Image Graphics Mode Normal Speed)
Format: ESC Y n-j ;n2;v-j ;V2;...V|<;
Changes from the Text mode to the 960 Bit- Image Graphics
mode, at normal speed. The printer cannot print dots on
consecutive dot positions. The input of data is similar to
ESC L.
Escape Z (1920 Bit-Image Graphics Mode)
Format: ESC Z;n<i ;n2;v<| ;V2;...V|<;
Changes from the Text mode to the 1920 Bit- Image Graphics
mode. The input is similar to the other Bit-Image Graphics
modes. ESC Z can print only every third dot position.
Escape (1/8-Inch Line Feeding)
Sets paper feeding to 3. 1 75 mm (1 /8 in.).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(48);
Escape 1 (7/72-Inch Line Feeding)
Sets paper feeding to 2.47 mm (7/72 in.).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(49);
Escape 2 (Start Variable Line Feeding)
ESC 2 is an execution command for ESC A. If no ESC A
command is given, line feeding returns to 4.23mm (1 /6 in.).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(50);
Escape 3 (Variable Line Feeding)
Format: ESC 3;n;
Changes the paper feeding to n/216 inch. The
example that follows sets the paper feeding to 1 /4 inch
The value of n must be between 1 and 255.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(51);CHR$(54);
Escape 6 (Select Character Set 2)
Selects Character Set 2. (See "Graphics Printer Character
Set 2" later in this section.)
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(54);
10 Graphics Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC 7
ESC 8
ESC 9
ESC-
ESC<
FF
HT
Escape 7 (Select Character Set 1)
Selects character set 1. (See "Graphics Printer Character
Set 1" later in this section.) Character set 1 is
automatically selected when the printer is set to on or reset.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(55);
Escape 8 (Ignore Paper End)
Allows the printer to print to the end of the paper. The
printer ignores the Paper End switch.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(56);
Escape 9 (Cancel Ignore Paper End)
Cancels the Ignore Paper End command. ESC 9 is
automatically selected when the printer is set to on or
reset.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(57);
Escape Minus (Underline)
Format: ESC -;n;
ESC - followed by a 1, prints all of the following data with
an underline.
ESC - followed by a (zero), cancels the Underline print
mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(45);CHR$(1);
Escape Less Than (Home Head)
The print head will return to the left margin to print one
line following ESC <.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(60);
Form Feed
Advances the paper to the top of the next page.
Note: The location of the paper when the printer
is set to on, determines the top of the page. The
next top of page is 279.4 mm (1 1 in.) from that position.
ESC C can be used to change the page length.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(12);
Horizontal Tab
Tabs to the next horizontal tab stop. Tab stops
are set every 8 columns when the printer's power is applied
and can be changed with ESC D.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(9);
Graphics Printer 1 1
Printer
Code
Printer Function
LF
NUL
SI
SO
Line Feed
Advances the paper up one line. Line spacing is 4.23 mm
(1 /6 in.) unless reset by ESC A, ESC 0, ESC 1, ESC 2 or ESC 3.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(10);
Null
Used with ESC B and ESC D as a list terminator.
NUL also is used with other printer control codes to select
options (for example, ESC S).
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(0);
Shift In (Compressed)
Changes the printer to the Compressed print mode.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(15);
Shift Out (Double Width)
Changes the printer to the Double Width print mode.
12 Graphics Printer
Printer Control Code Quick Reference
This is an alphabetic listing of the descriptions of the printer
control codes. You will find it helpful to locate the code you need
to perform a certain job, or determine the ASCII decimal value
quickly, once you are familiar with the control codes.
Note: ASCII values greater than 27 must be preceded by the
ESC code (ASCII value 27).
Description
Code
ASCII
Value
Alarm
BEL
7
Audible alarm
BEL
7
Bell
BEL
7
Buzzer
BEL
7
Cancel
CAN
24
Cancel data
CAN
24
Cancel double-strike printing
ESCH
72
Cancel double-width by line
DC4
20
Cancel double-width (lines)
ESCW
87
Cancel emphasized printing
ESCF
70
Cancel ignore paper end
ESC 9
57
Cancel perforation skip
ESCO
79
Cancel subscript/superscript
ESCT
84
Carriage return
CR
13
Character set 1 select
ESC 7
55
Character set 2 select
ESC 6
54
Character spacing 10 per inch
DC2
18
Character spacing 17.1 per inch
SI
15
Clear printer buffer
CAN
24
Command designator
ESC
27
Command end
NUL
Command prefix
ESC
27
Command start
ESC
27
Command terminator
NUL
Compressed On
SI
15
Compressed print
SI
15
Condensed print
SI
15
Data cancel
CAN
24
Double-strike printing
ESCG
71
Double-strike printing Off
ESCH
72
Graphics Printer 13
Description
Double-width-by-line Off
Double-width-by-line On
Double-width On (lines)
Double-width printing (lines)
Eject form
Eject paper
Emphasized printing
Emphasized printing Off
Escape
Feed line
Form feed
Graphics, 480 bit-image
Graphics, 960 bit-image, 1/2 speed
Graphics, 960 bit-image, full speed
Graphics 1920 bit-image
Head, home
Home head
Horizontal tab
Horizontal tab stops set
Ignore paper end
Ignore paper end, cancel
Length-of-page set in inches
Length-of-page set in lines
Line-feed, set 1/6 inch
Line-feed, set 1/8 inch
Line-feed, set 7/72 inch
Line-feed, set variable
Line-feed, set variable
Line-feed, set variable
Line-feed, start variable
Line-feed, set variable
Null
Page eject
Page length, set in inches
Page length, set in lines
Paper eject
Paper end, ignore
Perforation skip Off
Perforation skip set
Code
ASCII
Value
DC4
20
SO
14
ESCW
87
ESCW
87
FF
12
FF
12
ESCE
69
ESCF
70
ESC
27
LF
10
FF
12
ESCK
75
ESCL
76
ESCY
89
ESCZ
90
ESC<
60
ESC<
60
HT
9
ESCD
68
ESC 8
56
ESC 8
56
ESCC
67
ESCC
67
LF
10
ESCO
48
ESC 1
49
ESC 3
51
ESC A
65
ESC J
74
ESC 2
50
ESC J
74
NUL
FF
12
ESCC
67
ESCC
67
FF
12
ESC 8
56
ESCO
79
ESCN
78
14 Graphics Printer
Description
Print double-width one line
Print double-width multiple lines
Print emphasized
Print emphasized Off
Print 10 characters per inch
Print unidirectional On/Off
Printer buffer, clear
Return carriage
Select character set 1
Select character set 2
Set 1 (character set 1)
Set 1/8-inch line feed
Set 2 (character set 2)
Set 7/72-inch line feed
Set variable line feed
Set horizontal tab stops
Set page length in lines
Set page length in inches
Set perforation skip
Set variable line feed
Skip perforation Off
Skip perforation On
Start 7/72 inch line feed
Start double-strike print
Start double-width print by line
Start double-width print (lines)
Start emphasized print
Start perforation skip
Start subscript/ superscript
Start variable line feed
Start underline
Stop double-strike print
Stop double-width by line
Stop double-width print (lines)
Stop emphasized print
Stop perforation skip
Stop subscript/superscript
Stop superscript/subscript
Stop underline
Code
ASCII
Value
SO
14
ESCW
87
ESCE
69
ESCF
70
DC2
18
ESCU
85
CAN
24
CR
13
ESC 7
55
ESC 6
54
ESC 7
55
ESCO
48
ESC 6
54
ESC1
49
ESC 3
51
ESCD
68
ESCC
67
ESCC
67
ESCN
78
ESC A
65
ESCO
79
ESCN
78
ESC1
49
ESCG
71
SO
14
ESCW
87
ESCE
69
ESCN
78
ESCS
83
ESC 2
50
ESC-
45
ESCH
72
DC4
20
ESCW
87
ESCF
70
ESCO
79
ESCT
84
ESCT
84
ESC-
45
Graphics Printer 15
Description
Code
ASCII
Value
Stops, horizontal tabs, set
ESCD
68
Subscript/superscript Off
ESCT
84
Subscript/superscript On
ESCS
83
Tab horizontal
HT
9
Tab stops, horizontal, set
ESCD
68
Tabs horizontal set
ESCD
68
Underline On
ESC-
45
Unidirectional printing Off
ESCU
85
Unidirectional printing On
ESCU
85
Variable line feed
ESC 3
54
Variable line feed set
ESC 3
65
Variable line feed set
ESC J
74
Vertical tabs set
ESCB
66
Print Mode Combinations
The IBM Graphics Printer can use any of the combinations of
print modes listed in the following table. The print mode can be
changed at any place within a line. Modes can be selected and
combined if they are in the same vertical column.
Printer Modes
Normal
X
X
X
Compressed
X
X
X
Emphasized
X
X
X
Double Strike
X
X
X
Subscript
X
X
X
Superscript
X
X
X
Double Width
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Underline
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
16 Graphics Printer
Graphics Printer Character Set
The tables on the following pages show each character with its
respective ASCII value.
Graphics Printer 17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NUL
BEL
HT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18 19
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
0C2
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27 28 29
DC4
CAN
ESC
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37 38 39
SP
!
# 1
#
$
%
&
#
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47 48 49
(
)
*
+
/
•
/
1
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57 58 59
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
;
1
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67 68 69
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
c
D
E
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77 78 79
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87 88 89
P
Q
R
s
T
u
V
W
X
Y
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97 98 99
z
[
\
]
A
%
a
b
c
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107 108 109
d
e
f
g
h
i
J
k
I
m
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117 118 119
n
o
P
q
r
s
t
Li
V
w
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127 128 129
X
y
z
{
I
I
3
i+j>
DEL
NUL
Graphics Printer Character Set 1 (Part 1 of 2)
18 Graphics Printer
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
BEL
HT
LF
VT
140
141
142 143 144 145 146
147
148
149
FF
CR
SO
SI
DC2
DC4
150
151
152 153 154 155 156
157
158
159
CAN
ESC
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169
r
a
1
O
r
U
n
N
a
g
i
-
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179
-•
y t
X
■
1
«
»
■ ■■
■ ■■
■ ■■
■ ■ ■
■ ■■
■ ■■
|
1
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189
1HHhhWHii J l J
190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199
J hl l HT!H-|+iHh
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209
l l iflrl HH-FHt
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219
t\ l \ l l rl rl+l+l J I rll
220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229
BO
■
a
p
r
n
X
a
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
M
r
§
e
a
8
00
6
n
240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249
=
±
>
<
i
J
-7-
«
o
■
250 251 252 253 254 255
-
4
n
2
■
SP
Graphics Printer Character Set 1 (Part 2 of 2)
Graphics Printer 19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NUL
V ♦ **
BEL
HT
10
11
12
13 14 15
16
17
18 19
LF
FF
CR
SO
SI
DC2
20
21
22
23 24 25
26
27
28 29
DC4
§
CAN
ESC
30
31
32
33 34 35
36
37
38 39
SP
!
# t
#
$
%
&
1
40
41
42
43 44 45
46
47
48 49
(
)
*
+
1
■
/
1
50
51
52
53 54 55
56
57
58 59
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■
#
60
61
62
63 64 65
66
67
68 69
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
c
D
E
70
71
72
73 74 75
76
77
78 79
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
80
81
82
83 84 85
86
87
88 89
P
Q
R
s
T
U
V
W
X
Y
90
91
92
93 94 95
96
97
98 99
z
[
\
]
A
V
a
b
c
100
101
102
103 104 105
106
107
108 109
d
e
f
g
h
i
J
k
I
m
110
111
112
113 114 115
116
117
118 119
n
o
P
q
r
s
t
u
V
w
120
121
122
123 124 125
126
127
128 129
X
y
z
{
i
]
*+*
Q
u
Graphics Printer Character Set 2 (Part 1 of 2)
20 Graphics Printer
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
e
a
a
a
o
a
Q
e
e
e
Y
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
1
■x
1
A
o
A
E
ae
Jt
6
6
O
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
U
U
y
6
u
£
¥
R
f
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169
u
n
N
170 171 172 173 174 175 1
V,
X
«
»
177 178 179
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189
1HHhhHIHil J l J
190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199
J h I ¥hl HHtl H \
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209
■QmBErfi
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219
i"iiIFxl
220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229
■ l~~f a i8 r n x a
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
M
r
§
e
a
8
00
6
n
240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249
±
>
<
i
J
-=-
«
o
■
250 251 252 253 254 255
-
4
n
2
■
SP
Graphics Printer Character Set (Part 2 of 2)
Graphics Printer 21
DIP-Switch Settings
There are two DIP switches on the control circuit board. In order
to satisfy the user's specific requirements, desired control modes
are selectable by the DIP switches. The functions of the switches
and their preset conditions at the time of shipment are as shown
in the following figures.
DIP Switch 2 DIP Switch 1
Location of Printer DIP Switches
22 Graphics Printer
Switch
Number
Function
On
Off
Factory-Set
Condition
1-1
Not Applicable
-
-
On
1-2
CR
Print Only
Print &
Line Feed
On
1-3
Buffer Full
Print Only
Print &
Line Feed
Off
1-4
Cancel Code
Invalid
Valid
Off
1-5
Not Applicable
-
-
On
1-6
Error Buzzer
Sound
Does Not
Sound
On
1-7
Character Generator
Set 2
Set1
Off
1-8
SLCT IN Signal
Fixed
Internally
Not Fixed
Internally
On
Functions and Conditions of DIP Switch 1 (Graphics)
Switch
Number
Function
On
Off
Factory-Set
Condition
2-1
Form Length
304.8 mm
(12 inches)
279.4 mm
(11 inches)
Off
2-2
Line Spacing
3.175mm
(1/8 inch)
4.23 mm
(1/6 inch)
Off
2-3
Auto Feed XT Signal
Fixed
Internally
Not Fixed
Internally
Off
2-4
1 Inch Skip Over Perforation
Valid
Not Valid
Off
Functions and Conditions of DIP Switch 2 (Graphics)
Graphics Printer 23
24 Graphics Printer
Interface
Specifications:
• Data transfer rate: 1000 cps (maximum)
• Synchronization: By externally-supplied -STROBE pulses.
• Handshaking -ACKNLG or BUSY signals.
• Logic level: Input data and all interface control signals are
compatible with the TTL level.
Connector type: 57-30360 (Amphenol)
Data Transfer Sequence:
BUSY
0.5 /is (Minimum)
0.5 /xs (Minimum)
Parallel Interface Timing Diagram
Graphics Printer 25
26 Graphics Printer
Specifications
Size
Height
Width
Depth
107 mm (4.2 in.)
400 mm (15.7 in.)
305 mm (12 in.)
Weight
5.5 kg (12 1b)
Power Cable
Length
Size
1.83 m (6 ft)
18AWG
Signal Cable
Length
Size
1 .83 m (6 ft)
22AWG
Physical Specifications
Voltage (Vac)
Frequency
(Hz)
Current
(Amps)
Power
(Watts)
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
±3 Hz
Maximum
Maximum
120
104
127
60
1.0
100
220
198
242
50/60
0.5
100
240
216
264
50/60
0.5
100
Electrical Specifications
Graphics Printer 27
Print Method
Serial-impact wire matrix
Print Speed
80cps
Print Direction
Bidirectional with logical seeking
Number of Pins in Head
9
Line Spacing
4.23 mm (1 /6 in.) or programmable
Printing Characteristics
Matrix
Graphic Character
9x9
See "Graphics Printer Character Set"
tables.
Printing Sizes
Normal
Double Width
Compressed
Double Width-Compressed
Subscript
Superscript
Maximum
Characters characters
per inch pe r line
10 80
5 40
17.1 132
8.25 66
10 80
10 80
Media Handling
Paper Feed
Paper Width Range
Copies
Paper Path
Adjustable sprocket pin feed
101.6 mm (4 in.) to 254 mm (10 in.)
One original plus two carbon copies
(total thickness not to exceed 0.3 mm
(0.012 in.)). Minimum paper thickness
is 0.064 mm (0.0025 in.).
Rear
Interfaces
Standard
Parallel 8-bit
Data and Control Lines
Inked Ribbon
Color
Type
Life Expectancy
Black
Cartridge
3 million characters
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
5to35°C(41 to95°F)
10 to 80% non-condensing
Heat Output
341 BTU/hr (maximum)
Printer Specifications
28 Graphics Printer
Connector Pin Assignments
Signal
Pin No.
Return
Pin No.
Signal
Direction
Description
1
19
STROBE
In
STROBE pulse to read data
in. Pulse width must be
more than 0.5 ps at
receiving terminal. The
signal level is normally
"high"; read-in of data is
performed at the "low"
level of this signal.
2
20
DATA1
In
These signals represent
information of the 1 st to
8th bits of parallel data
respectively. Each signal
is at "high" level when
data is logical "1" and
"low" when logical "0."
3
21
DATA 2
In
4
22
DATA 3
In
5
23
DATA 4
In
6
24
DATA 5
In
7
25
DATA 6
In
8
26
DATA 7
In
9
27
DATA 8
In
10
28
Out
Approximately 5 ps pulse;
"low" indicates that data
has been received and the
printer is ready to accept
other data.
ACKNLG
11
29
BUSY
Out
A "high" signal indicates
that the printer cannot
receive data. The signal
becomes "high" in the
following cases:
1. During data entry.
2. During printing
operation.
3. In "offline" state.
4. During printer error
status.
Connector Pin Assignment and Descriptions of Interface Signals
(Part 1 of 3)
Graphics Printer 29
Signal
Pin No.
Return
Pin No.
Signal
Direction
Description
12
30
PE
Out
A "high" signal indicates
that the printer is out of
paper.
13
SLCT
Out
This signal indicates that
the printer is in the
selected state.
14
AUTO
FEED XT
In
With this signal being at
"low" level, the paper is
automatically fed one line
after printing. (The signal
level can be fixed to
"low" with DIP SW pin
2-3 provided on the
control circuit board.)
15
-
NC
Not used.
16
-
OV
Logic GND level.
17
CHASSIS-
GND
Printer chassis GND. In
the printer, the chassis
GND and the logic GND
are isolated from each
other.
18
-
NC
-
Not used.
19-30
—
GND
—
"Twisted-Pair Return"
signal; GND level.
31
TnTt
In
When the level of this
signal becomes "low"
the printer controller is
reset to its initial state and
the print buffer is cleared.
This signal is normally at
"high" level, and its pulse
width must be more than
50 |is at the receiving
terminal.
Connector Pin Assignment and Descriptions of Interface Signals
(Part 2 of 3)
30 Graphics Printer
Signal
Pin No.
Return
Pin No.
Signal
Direction
Description
32
ERROR
Out
The level of this signal
becomes "low" when the
printer is in "Paper End"
state, "Offline" state and
"Error" state.
33
—
GND
—
Same as with pin
numbers 19 to 30.
34
-
NC
-
Not used.
35
Pulled up to +5 Vdc
through 4.7 k-ohms
resistance.
36
SLCT IN
In
Data entry to the printer is
possible only when the
level of this signal is
"low." (Internal fixing can
be carried out with DIP
SW 1-8. The condition at
the time of shipment is
set "low" for this signal.)
Notes: 1. "Direction" refers to the direction of signal flow as viewed from the
printer.
2. "Return" denoted "Twisted-Pair Return" and is to be connected at
signal-ground level.
When wiring the interface, be sure to use a twisted-pair cable for
each signal and never fail to complete connection on the return
side. To prevent noise effectively, these cables should be shielded
and connected to the chassis of the system unit and printer,
respectively.
3. All interface conditions are based on TTL level. Both the rise and fall
times of each signal must be less than 0.2 ps.
4.
Data transfe
BUSY signal
after confirnr
signal is "lov
r must not be carried out by ignoring the ACKNLG or
(Data transfer to this printer can be carried out only
ling the ACKNLG signal or when the level of the BUSY
v.")
Connector Pin Assignment and Descriptions of Interface Signals
(Part 3 of 3)
Graphics Printer 31
32 Graphics Printer
Logic Diagrams
The following page and f oldout contain the logic diagrams for the
the IBM Graphics Printer.
Graphics Printer 33
■[i
34 Graphics Printer
Graphics Printer (Sheet 1 of 2)
/TTT
-=\
ATB"
"^Fr\
T\
PURPLE GRAY WHITE YELLOW BLUE ORANGE
BROWN BLACK
Graphics Printer (Sheet 2 of 2)
Graphics Printer 35/36
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer
Color Printer
6361478
Contents
Description 1
Major Subsystems 3
6803 Microprocessor 6
Programming Considerations 9
Printer Control Codes 9
Printer Control Code Quick Reference 29
Printing in Color 36
Color Printer Character Set 1 37
Color Printer Character Set 2 39
All Printable Characters 41
DIP-Switch Settings 43
Interface 45
Specifications 47
Connector Pin Assignments 50
Logic Diagrams 53
Index Index- 1
in
IV
Description
The IBM Personal Computer Color Printer is a tabletop, wire
matrix, color printer. It attaches to the system unit's Printer
Adapter or combination Monochrome Display and Printer
Adapter through a standard printer cable, which has a 25-pin
connector on the system unit end and a 36-pin connector on the
printer end.
When the Color Printer is ready to accept data, the system unit
sends the data and control codes through the printer cable to the
printer's input/output (I/O) board. The I/O board directs the
data and control codes to a buffer. The 6803 Microprocessor on
the printer's controller circuit board monitors the buffer
constantly and decides when and how to print the information
based on the control codes.
The 6803 Microprocessor takes a character from the buffer and
compares the character against a table to determine what dots to
print. If the character is a control character, the microprocessor
compares the character against a control-character table so that it
knows what action to take.
When the 6803 Microprocessor reads a line-ending character, it
determines whether it would be faster to move to the right margin
and print backwards or to the left margin to begin printing. This
ability, called logic seeking, allows faster printer output.
Color Printer 1
The following block diagram shows the operation of the IBM
Personal Computer Color Printer.
Mode
Switches
and Sensors
Parallel
Data
Data
Flow
Control
I/O
Interface
c
6803
Micro-
processor
7S
v>*^ SZ
7>
Bidirectional Data Bus
7s:
±2.
1>
Ribbon
Feed
Circuit
Carriage
Drive
Circuit
Paper
Feed
Circuit
Wire
Drive
Circuit
Function
Select
Switch
Printer
Status
Indicators
Color Printer Block Diagram
2 Color Printer
Major Subsystems
The three major electromechanical subsystems of the printer are
the I/O subsystem, controller subsystem, and print subsystem.
Each subsystem is controlled by the 6803 Microprocessor
mounted on the controller circuit board. The power-supply
regulator circuits are an integrated portion of the controller card.
The I/O Subsystem
The I/O circuit board contains the circuits needed to direct the
parallel data from the computer and interface cable to the
printer's controller circuit board for processing. The I/O board
also contains the circuits for directing operational status signals
between the printer and the system unit.
Controller Subsystem
The controller subsystem consists of a 6803 Microprocessor and
its peripheral interface and memory devices, which are mounted
on the controller circuit board. The controller line buffer accepts
data from the computer through the printer's I/O board. The
controller decodes the data, then sends the data to the print
subsystem for printing.
The controller also controls operation of the paper and ribbon
feed. These circuits are activated by programming or by a
function-select switch. Power regulation and distribution within
the printer are also controlled by the controller board.
Color Printer 3
The power regulator circuit, which is part of the controller circuit
board, receives 5,10, and 40 volts ac from the power supply
transformer. It rectifies and distributes the different voltages to
the various circuits and motors in the printer.
Print Subsystem
The print subsystem prints the data received from the controller.
The subsystem consists of the following:
Print head and carriage assembly
Carriage drive motor and belt
Left-margin sensor
Paper feed assembly
Ribbon drive assembly
The print head contains nine print wires. The print wires are
staggered in two vertical columns with five wires in one column
and four wires in the other. This arrangement is designed to allow
overlapping of print dots. Selectively driving the wires against the
ribbon and paper as the print head is moved across the platen,
results in the printing of high-quality characters.
The print head is mounted on a carriage which is driven
bidirectionally by the carriage drive stepper motor and drive belt.
The left-margin sensor is used to signal the controller that the
print head is at the home position.
4 Color Printer
The paper feed assembly is made up of a tractor assembly, paper
stepper motor, and a paper-out sensor. It feeds the forms into
position and holds the paper stationary while printing.
Continuous forms are fed by pin belts in the tractor assembly, and
single sheets of paper are fed by pressure rolls in the paper path.
The pin belts and pressure rolls are driven by a drive shaft, drive
belt, and the paper stepper motor.
The ribbon feed assembly drives the ribbon between the paper
and the print head at a constant speed. It consists of a ribbon
cartridge, ribbon drive motor, and a ribbon feed path made up of
two rollers, two fixed posts, and a print-head ribbon guide. The
ribbon cartridge contains a continuous loop of pre-inked 19-mm
(3/4-in.) wide ribbon. The ribbon is pulled from the cartridge,
around two guide posts, through the print-head ribbon guide,
around two more ribbon posts, and "stuffed" back into the
cartridge by two "stuffing" wheels.
In order to print different colors, the ribbon is shifted up and
down by the color control mechanism, which is made up of a
motor and cam assembly. The cam pivots the complete ribbon
feed assembly to four different levels that match the four color
bands on the ribbon.
Color Printer 5
6803 Microprocessor
The 6803 Microprocessor and its peripheral devices, which are
mounted on the controller circuit board, direct all operations of
the printer. This 8 -bit single-chip microprocessor unit (MPU)
functions as a monolithic MPU requiring one +5-Vdc power
supply and is TTL-compatible. On-chip resources include parallel
I/O and a three function programmable timer. Some of the other
features include:
Enhanced 6800 MPU instruction set
8x8 multiply instruction
Upward-source and object-code compatibility with the 6800
MPU
Expanded operation to 64K-byte address space
29 parallel I/O and 2-handshake control lines
Internal clock generator with divide-by-4 output
The program-controlled operating mode determines the
configuration of 18 of the 40 MPU pins available, location
(internal or external) of interrupt vectors, and type of external
bus. The configuration of the remaining 22 pins is not dependent
on the operating mode.
Twenty nine pins are organized as three 8-bit ports and one 5 -bit
port. Each port consists of at least a data register and a
write-only data-direction register. The data-direction register is
used to define whether corresponding bits in the data register are
configured as an input (clear) or output (set).
6 Color Printer
When the port is used as a "data port" or "I/O port," it is
controlled by the port data direction register and the programmer
has direct access to the port pins using the port Data Register.
Port pins are labeled as Pij, where "i" identifies one of four ports
and "j" indicates the particular bit. The operating mode
determines the configuration of Port 3, Port 4, SCI, SC2, and the
physical location of the interrupt vectors.
The mode used by the 6803 MPU is called the Expanded
Multiplexed mode. Expanded Multiplexed mode refers to the
type of bus it supports. In this mode, Port 3 functions as a
time-multiplexed address/data bus with address valid on the
negative edge of Address Strobe (AS), and data valid while "E"
(which is a timing signal), is high. Port 4 provides address lines
A8toA15.
Color Printer 7
8 Color Printer
Programming Considerations
Printer Control Codes
The following pages list, in alphabetic order, the printer control
codes with a description of each. Some knowledge of BASIC
programming is necessary to insert printer control codes in your
program. An example of each code in BASIC is at the end of
each description. The "Format" information is given where more
information is needed for programming considerations.
Note: All combinations of printing qualities, character
spacings, and types are valid. For example, you can print in
emphasized print, double-width, and underline all at the same
time.
The printer can accept parameters for the ESC commands in
either of two formats:
• Binary
• ASCII Character
Although the default format is binary (as used in all examples in
the "Printer Control Codes" section), the command, ESC @;n;,
can be used to select either format.
This command affects only certain numeric parameters which
follow ESC control codes. Parameters not affected by this
command are those which select On or Off (1 or 0) because the
Color Printer operates on only the least significant bit of n in
these commands. Therefore, any odd-numbered ASCII decimal
value gives the same result as n= 1 and any even-numbered ASCII
decimal value gives the same result as n=0.
Color Printer 9
Parameters affected by this command are given in the following
three examples:
1. A parameter defining numeric values.
In ASCII format these parameters must be stated as
decimal characters, with each numeric field terminated
with a non-numeric character (semicolon recommended).
For example, to select the near letter quality type font,
(ESC 13) the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(73); M 3; M ;
In binary format the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(73); CHR$(3);
2. A parameter defining lists of values ending in NUL.
In ASCII format these parameters must be stated as
decimal numeric characters, with each numeric field
terminated with a non-numeric character (semicolon
recommended) , with the final NUL being a second
semicolon. For example, to set tabs at columns 10 and 40,
(ESC D) the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(68); M 10;40;; M ;
In binary format the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(68);CHR$(10);CHR$(40);CHR$(0);
3. A two byte parameter (nl;n2;) defining the amount of data to
be printed after the command.
In ASCII format this parameter must be sent as a single
decimal numeric value (0 to XXXX) terminated with a
non-numeric character (semicolon recommended). For
example, to print twenty eight bytes in bit-image graphics,
(ESC K) the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(75); M 28; ,f :FORX= 1 TO 28: LPRINT
CHR$(255);:NEXTX
In binary format the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(75);CHR$(28);CHR$(0);: FORX = 1 TO 28:
LPRINT CHR$(255);: NEXT X
10 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
BEL Audible Alarm
Sounds the printer buzzer for 1 second or less. The buzzer
may be turned off with DIP Switch 8.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(7);
BS Backspace
Moves the print head one character width to the left. The
character width is determined by the selected character
spacing.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(8);
CAN Clear Data
Clears the printer memory of all data waiting to be printed
following the last received line ending code. If the
initialize function is set On by ESC ? (Set Initialize
Signal Function), all control codes, except SO (Double- Width
printing), remain in effect. If the initialize function is
set Off by ESC ?, all control codes are cleared and the
printer is set to the values set by the DIP switches. (See
"ESC ?" for more details about the initialize
function.)
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(24);
CR Carriage Return
Causes the printer to print the data that follows CR
beginning at the left margin. No line-feed operation takes
place unless DIP Switch 4 is On or ESC 5 (automatic
line-feed) has been sent.
Note: IBM Personal Computer BASIC (and many other
programs) automatically sends LF (line feed) with CR.
If you do not want LF sent after CR, use ASCII decimal
value 141 from Character Set 1 instead of ASCII decimal
value 13.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(13);
DC1 Select Printer
Sets the printer to accept data from the system unit.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(17);
DC2 10 Characters per Inch Print
Selects character spacing of 10 characters per inch.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(18);
Color Printer 11
Printer
Code
Printer Function
DC3
DC4
ESC
ESC A
ESC a
ESCB
Deselect Printer
Sets the Color Printer so it will not accept data from the
system unit. A printer must be initialized by the system or
control panel buttons or selected using DC1 (Select Printer)
to accept data.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(19);
Cancel Double-Width Printing by Line
Ends double-width printing by line which was started by SO.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(20);
Command Prefix
Sets the printer to accept the next data sent as a printer
command. (See the following list.)
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);
Store Text Line Spacing
Format: ESC A;n;
ESC A stores a line-feed value of n/72 inch. ESC 2
(Start Text Line Spacing) must then be sent before the line
spacing will change. For example, to store a line-feed value
of 24/72 inch, the code is ESC A 24. However, until
ESC 2 is sent, any text following the ESC A 24 will space at
the previously set line-feed increment. The text following
the ESC 2 will be printed with a new line-feed increment of
24/72 inch. Any increment between 1 /72 and
85/72 may be used.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(65);CHR$(n);
Select Automatic Ribbon-Band Shift
Causes the ribbon to shift one color band at the end of each
page. This command is used with an all-black ribbon to
extend the ribbon life.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(97);
Set Vertical Tabs
Format: ESC B;^ ;n 2 ;...n 64 ;NUL;
Sets the vertical tab-stop positions. The power-on default
is without vertical tab stops set. n-| through
"64 represent tab-stop positions by line number.
The topmost line of the page is line 0. Tab-stop positions
must be received in ascending numeric order and cannot exceed
the set page length. Up to 64 positions are recognized by
the Color Printer. The positions do not take effect until
NUL is received.
12 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC B. Once vertical tab stops are set, they remain in effect until
Cont. new ones are specified or all tab stops are set to the
power-on defaults by ESC R (Set All Tabs to Power-On
Defaults). If no vertical tab stops are set, the Vertical
Tab (VT) command behaves as a Line Feed (LF) command.
ESC B followed only by NUL cancels all vertical tab stops.
The form length must be set by the ESC C command (Set Page
Length in Lines) prior to setting vertical tab stops.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(66);CHR$(n 1 );
CHR$(n 2 );...CHR$(n 64 );CHR$(0);
ESC b Select Band 4
Selects ribbon band 4 (black). The printer will continue to
print with band 4 until a command to change the ribbon band
is received.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(98);
ESC C Set Page Length in Lines
Format: ESC C;n;
Sets the page length in lines. The number of lines n is
converted to inches using the current line spacing. ESC C
must be followed by a value, n, that specifies the desired
length of page in lines. Maximum page length for this
printer is 127 lines. This command also sets the current
position of the paper as the top-of-form.
Note: Automatic perforation-skip (ESC N) and vertical
tabs (ESC B) may need to be reset after changing the
page length.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67);CHR$(n);
ESC C Set Page Length in Inches
Format: ESC C;0;n;
Sets the page length in inches. This command requires a
value of n between 1 and 22. The power-on default is set
with DIP Switch 6. This command also sets the current
position of the paper as the top-of-form.
Note: Automatic perforation-skip (ESC N) and vertical
tabs (ESC B) may need to be reset after changing the
page length.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67);CHR$(0); CHR$(n);
Color Printer 13
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCc
ESCD
ESCd
ESCE
Select Band 3
Selects ribbon band 3. The actual color printed will depend
on the ribbon being used. The printer will continue to print
with band 3 until a command to change the ribbon band is
received.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(99);
Set Horizontal Tabs
Format: ESC D;^ ;n 2 ;...n 2 8;NUL;
Sets the horizontal tab-stop positions represented by
n-| through n 2 s- The power-on
default is a tab stop set at column 8 and every eighth column
thereafter. The printer recognizes up to 28 horizontal tab
stops. They must be in ascending numeric order and followed
by NUL. Tab stops can be set between 1 and the maximum
column count for the character spacing in effect. ESC D
immediately followed by NUL will clear all horizontal tabs.
ESC R (Set All Tabs to Power-On Defaults) may be used to set
horizontal tabs to the power-on default.
Note: Setting a tab at column clears all tabs and
the following tabs will be considered data.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(68);CHR$( ni );
CHR$(n 2 );...CHR$(n 2 8);CHR$(0);
Variable Forward Space
Format: ESC d;n-j;n 2 ;
Places the next printed character
ni ;n 2 /1 20 inch to the right of the last
dot of the current character. The position may be beyond the
right margin setting. If the position is beyond the physical
end of the line, the next character will be printed at the
left end of the printer.
n<| and n 2 are binary numbers that
specify the number of 1 / 120- inch increments the next printed
character is to be placed to the right. n«|
represents values from to 255, and n 2
represents values from to 255 times 256.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(100);CHR$(n 1 );CHR$(n 2 );
Emphasized Printing
Changes the printer to emphasized printing. Characters are
double struck with the smallest possible horizontal offset
between strikes.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(69);
14 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC e Variable Backspace
Format: ESC e;n<|;ri2;
Places the next printed character n<|;n2/120 inch to
the left of the last dot of the current character. The
position may be beyond the left margin setting. If the
specified position is beyond the physical left end of the
printer, the next character will be printed at the left end
of the printer. n<| and n2 are binary numbers that specify
the number of 1 /120-inch increments the next printed
character is to be placed to the left. n<| represents
values from to 255, and n2 represents values
from to 255 times 256.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(101);CHR$(n 1 );CHR$(n 2 );
ESC F Cancel Emphasized Printing
Ends emphasized printing started by ESC E.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(70);
ESC G Double-Strike Printing
Sets the printer to double-strike printing. Characters are
struck twice with no horizontal offset between strikes.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(71);
ESC H Cancel Double-Strike Printing
Ends double-strike printing started by ESC G.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(72);
ESC I Change Printing Quality
Format ESC l;n;
Selects the printing quality. When n is 1, data processing
quality is selected; when n is 2, text quality is selected;
when n is 3, letter quality is selected. Each printing quality
selection produces a different spacing of the dots that make up
a character. Each character box is: with data- processing
quality selected, 8 by 9 dots; with text quality selected, 24
by 9 dots; and with near-letter quality selected, 36 by 18 dots.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(73);CHR$(n);
ESC J Variable Line Space
Format: ESC J;n;
Advances the paper in increments of n/144 inch. The value of
n must be between 1 and 255. Line spacing of 14/144 is
recommended for bit-image graphics using eight bits. ESC J
is canceled after the line space takes place. The value of n
is not stored.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(74);CHR$(n);
Color Printer 15
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCK
1108 Bit-Image Graphics
Format: ESC K;n<|;ri2;vi;v2;...vi<|08'
Sets dot spacing to 84 by 84 dots per Inch in 1 :1 aspect
ratio, to 70 by 84 dots per inch in 5:6 aspect ratio (see
"ESC n (Set Aspect Ratio)"). All bit-image graphics is
printed from left to right. If the graphics data exceeds the
space remaining on the line, the data to be printed beyond
the end of the line is printed at the left margin on the next
line.
n<| and n2 are binary numbers that specify the number
of bit- image data bytes to be transferred, n-j represents
values from to 255, and n2 represents values from to 4
times 256. The total number of bit-image data bytes is
equal to n<| + n2 x 256 and cannot exceed 1 108 (the total
number of dot positions in a 13.2 inch line).
Bit-image graphics is printed using eight of the nine
print- head wires (the bottom wire is not used).
v-| through vno8 are bit-image data bytes, each of which
represents a set of 8 dots in a vertical line. The
horizontal position of these 8 dots is determined by the
position of the bit- image data byte within the vi through
v 1108 series, v-j is printed at the starting
position followed in order from left to right by V2
through v<| <|08- Each bit of a bit- image data byte
represents a vertical dot position at the horizontal position
represented by that bit- image data byte. The lowest value,
or least significant bit (Bit 0), represents the bottom dot
position, and the highest value, or most significant bit
(Bit 7), represents the top dot position.
16 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCK
Cont.
ESCL
ESCM
In the following table the left-hand column of (*)s
represents dot positions within a vertical line. The
right-hand column shows the corresponding bit number
within a bit-image data byte. (The bits are numbered
7 through 0, from left to right.)
Dot Position
Bit
Number
Top
•
-
7
•
—
6
•
-
5
•
-
4
•
-
3
•
-
2
•
-
1
Bottom
•
-
For example: if v-j is binary 10000000 (decimal 128), only the
top dot prints in that horizontal position; if v-j is binary
00000001 (decimal 01), only the bottom dot prints; and if
v-| is binary 11111111 (decimal 255), all eight dots print.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(75);CHR$(n 1 );
CHR$(n 2 );CHR$(v 1 );CHR$(v 2 ); ... CHR$(v 1108 );
2216 Bit-Image Graphics (half-speed)
Format: ESC L;ni;n2;v<|;v2;...V22i6'
Sets dot spacing to 168 by 84 dots per inch in 1 :1 aspect
ratio, to 140 by 84 dots per inch in 5:6 aspect ratio (see
"ESC n (Set Aspect Ratio)"). 2216 bit-image graphics
(half-speed) prints at one-half the speed of 2216 bit-image
graphics (ESC Y) for improved print quality and the ability
to print consecutive dot positions, n<|, n2, v<|,
and V2 through V2216 represent the same values as in 1 108
bit-image graphics (ESC K). Refer to the description of ESC
K for a complete description of these values. The total
number of bit-image data bytes cannot exceed 2216 (the total
number of dot positions in a 13.2-inch line).
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(76);CHR$(n 1 );
CHR$(n 2 );CHR$(v 1 );CHR$(v 2 ); ... CHR$(v 22 16);
Automatic Line Justification
Format: ESC M;n;
Justifies the right margin. Automatic justification is
started when n is 1, and stopped when n is 0. The printer
adjusts the spaces between words in the text so that the last
character of the words at the end of the lines all print in
the last position of the line. Thus both the left and right
margins appear as straight lines. This gives a block
appearance to the printed text. Automatic line justification
can be used with any of the character spacings.
Color Printer 17
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCM
Cont.
ESCm
ESCN
Notes:
1 . Lines are not right justified if the text is less
than 75% of the specified line length. If a line fails
the greater than 75% rule, the remaining portion of the
text is tested.
2. If the justification results in a word wrap
condition, the remaining text is treated as separate
lines and follows the above rule.
3. Control codes in the datastream cause the text
before the control code to be printed based on the
justification rules. The remainder of the text is justified
between the current print position and the right margin.
4. If the last line of a paragraph, or any line of data,
is not to be justified, use the control code sequence,
backspace (BS) and carriage return (CR).
5. The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(77);CHR$(n);
Select Band 2
Selects ribbon band 2. The actual color printed depends on
the ribbon being used. The printer will continue to print
with band 2 until a command to change the ribbon band is
received by the printer.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(109);
Set Automatic Perforation-Skip
Format: ESC N;n;
Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of
each page. This causes the printer to automatically skip
over the perforation between pages of continuous forms. The
number of lines n, is converted to inches using the
line-spacing in effect. The value of n must be between 1 and
127. ESC N must be reset anytime the page length is changed
by ESC C (Set Page Length in Lines) or by ESC C (Set Page
Length in Inches).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(78);CHR$(n);
18 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC n Set Aspect Ratio
Format: ESC n;x;
Sets the printer to a 5:6 or 1 :1 aspect ratio. When x is 1, the
aspect ratio is set to 1:1; when x is 0, the aspect ratio is
set to 5:6. With the 5:6 aspect ratio selected, graphics are
printed to match the shape that appears on the display. The
1 :1 aspect ratio is recommended for bit-image graphics to
improve quality and simplify bit-position calculations. The
power-on default is the 5:6 aspect ratio.
Note: The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(1 10);CHR$(x);
ESC O Cancel Automatic Perforation-Skip
Cancels the automatic perforation-skip function.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(79);
ESC P Proportional Spacing
Format: ESC P;n;
Starts proportional spacing when n is 1 . Stops proportional
spacing when n is 0. Proportional spacing gives each
different character a different amount of space on the line.
That is, narrow characters, such as i, are given a small
amount of space on the line relative to a broader character,
such as M. This is similar to the way people write
characters and gives a more balanced look to the text. Many
books are printed in proportional spacing, as is this one.
The distance of a forward space is 10 units; the distance of
a backspace is determined by the last printed character or
space, if the printing of the character or the space was the
last carriage movement.
Normal processing of all control codes continues during
proportional spacing.
Note: The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(80);CHR$(n);
Color Printer 19
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCQ2
ESCR
ESCS
ESC SI
ESC SO
Deselect Specific Printer
Format: ESC Q;2;
Sets only the Color Printer so it will not accept data from the
system unit. The printer must be initialized by the system
or selected using DC1 (Select Printer) to accept data.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(81);CHR$(2);
Set All Tabs to Power-On Defaults
Sets all tabs, horizontal and vertical, to the power-on
defaults.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(82);
Subscript or Superscript Printing
Format: ESC S;n;
ESC S followed by 1 changes the printer to subscript
printing. ESC S followed by changes the printer to
superscript printing. ESC S is canceled by ESC T.
Notes:
1 . If line feed (LF) codes are issued while in
subscript or superscript printing, the line feed does
not change the subscript or superscript setting. For
example, if in superscript printing, the line feed
causes the paper to advance to the superscript
position of the next line.
2. The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(83);CHR$(n);
Compressed Printing
Alternate command for SI.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(15);
Double-Width Printing by Line
Alternate command for SO.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(14);
20 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC T Cancel Subscript or Superscript
Ends subscript or superscript printing started by ESC S.
Note: If ESC T is issued when not printing in
subscript or superscript, it is acknowledged and
ignored.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(84);
ESC U Unidirectional Printing
Format: ESC U;n;
When n is 1, sets the printer to print from left to right
only. ESC U returns the printer to normal two-direction
printing. Unidirectional printing ensures a more accurate
printing start position for better print quality.
Note: The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(85);CHR$(n);
ESC W Continuous Double-Width Printing
Format: ESC W;n;
ESC W 1 changes the printer to double-width printing. ESC W
ends the double-width printing started by ESC W 1 . ESC W 1
is not canceled by a line ending code and must be canceled by
ESC W 0.
Note: The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(87);CHR$(n);
Color Printer 21
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCX
ESCY
ESCy
Set Left and Right Margins
Format: ESC X;n-| ;r»2;
The numbers, n<| and n2, are selected in relation to the left
side of the printer, with n-j representing the left margin and
n2 the right margin. The value of n-j or n2 is the column of
the page you wish to set as the left or right margin.
n2 must be greater than n<| by 1 .27 cm (1 /2 inch) or more,
and cannot be greater than 13.2 times the character-spacing
(in characters per inch) in effect. If n2 is greater than this
limit, the right margin will be set at the maximum allowable
length. Data is printed beginning in column n-j. Column n2
is considered the last printable position of the line.
If a word to be printed exceeds the right margin, a
carriage-return and line-feed are inserted before the word, and
the word is printed on the next line. The margins are converted
to inches based on the current character-spacing setting.
The power-on default is set with DIP Switch 5.
Note: Both ni and n2 must be included in
the command or the results will be unpredictable.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(88);CHR$( ni );CHR$(n 2 );
2216 Bit-Image Graphics
Format: ESC Y;n-| ;n2;v<| ;V2;...V2216'
Sets dot spacing to 168 by 84 dots per inch in 1 :1 aspect
ratio, to 140 by 84 dots per inch in 5:6 aspect ratio (see
"ESC n (Set Aspect Ratio)") and prints at normal printing
speed. ESC Y graphics cannot print dots in consecutive
horizontal dot positions. If consecutive dot positions are
specified, the printer will not print the second dot.
n-|, n2, v-|, and V2, through V2216 represent
the same values as in 1 108 Bit- Image Graphics (ESC K). Refer
to the description of ESC K for a complete description of these
values. The number of bit- image databytes cannot exceed
2216 (the total number of dot positions in a 13.2-inch line).
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(89);CHR$( ni );CHR$(n 2 );
CHR$(vi);CHR$(v 2 );...CHR$(v 2 216);
Select Band 1
Selects ribbon band 1 . The actual color printed depends on
the ribbon being used. The printer will continue to print
with band 1 until a command to change the ribbon band is
received by the printer.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(121);
22 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC Z 4432 Bit-Image Graphics
Format: ESC Z;n-j ;n2,"v<| ,V2,"...V4432;
Sets dot spacing to 336 by 84 dots per inch in 1 :1 aspect
ratio, to 280 by 84 dots per inch in 5:6 aspect ratio (see
"ESC n (Set Aspect Ratio)"). 4432 bit-image graphics
prints at one-half the speed of 1 108 bit-image graphics (ESC
K) for improved print quality. ESC Z graphics can print only
every third consecutive horizontal dot position. If
consecutive dot positions are specified, the printer will
ignore the second and third dots.
n2, v-|, V2, and V4432 represent the same
values as in 1 108 bit-image graphics (ESC K). Refer to the
description of ESC K for a complete description of these
values. The number of bit-image databytes cannot exceed
4432 (the total number of dot positions in a 13.2-inch line).
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(90);CHR$(n 1 );CHR$(n 2 );
CHRSiv^CHR&v^; ...CHR$(v 4 43 2 );
ESC 1/8 Inch Line Spacing
Sets line spacing to 8 lines per inch.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(48);
ESC 1 6/72 Inch Line Spacing
Sets line spacing to 6/72 inch.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(49);
ESC 2 Start Text Line Spacing
ESC 2 is an execution command for ESC A (Set Text Line
Spacing). If no ESC A command has been given, line spacing
returns to 6 lines per inch.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(50);
ESC 3 Graphics Line Spacing
Format: ESC 3;n;
Sets line spacing to n/144 inch. Line spacing of 14/144 is
recommended for bit-image graphics using eight bits. The
value of n must be between 1 and 255.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(51);CHR$(n);
ESC 4 Set Top of Page
Sets the current vertical position as the top-of-page.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(52);
Color Printer 23
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC 5
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC-
Automatic Line Feed
Format: ESC 5;n;
When n is 1, automatic line feeding starts; the printer will
line-feed each time a code that indicates the end of a line, such
as CR, is received. When n is 0, automatic line feeding stops.
Note: The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(53);CHR$(n);
Select Character Set 2
Selects character set 2. (See "Character Set 2.")
Character Set 2 contains most characters and symbols used in
non- English languages. The power-on default for Character
Set is set with DIP Switch 1 .
Note: Some programs use the control codes in Character
Set 1 that have ASCII decimal values above 128. These
control codes are not in Character Set 2. The use of
Character Set 2, therefore, may not give the desired
results with some programs.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(54);
Select Character Set 1
Selects character set 1. (See "Character Set 1".)
Character Set 1 contains characters and symbols commonly used
in the English language, along with some common, non-English,
characters and symbols. The power-on default for Character
Set is set with DIP Switch 1 .
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(55);
Continuous Underline
Format: ESC-;n;
When n is 1 -all of the following data is underlined. ESC -
followed by cancels underlining.
Note: The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd- numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(45);CHR$(n);
24 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC : 12 Characters per Inch Printing
Sets character spacing to 12 characters per inch.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(58);
ESC < Move Carriage to Home Position
Returns the print head to the left side of the printer to
print the line following the command. No line feed occurs.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(60);
ESC ? Set Initialize Signal Function
Format: ESC ?;n;
Defines what the printer does when an initialize signal is
received. The initialize signal is a hardware signal sent to
the printer by the system unit when called for by the program
being used. This signal is commonly called for when a
program is first loaded. When n is 1, the initialize function
is set On; when n is 0, the initialize function is set Off.
When the initialize function is On, the initialize signal
causes the printer to clear all data from the printer memory
and set all printer functions to the power-on defaults. Some
of the data may not have been printed and will be lost.
When the initialize function is Off, the initialize signal
causes the printer to insert CAN (Clear Data) into the data
in the printer memory. The CAN, when processed by the
printer, clears the printer memory of all data waiting to be
printed following the-last received line-ending code. All
control codes are cleared and the printer is set to the values
set by the DIP switches. This allows a printing job to be
completed before the printer is reset for the next application.
The power-on default is the initialize function set Off.
Note: The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=0.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(63);CHR$(n);
Color Printer 25
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC@
ESC \
ESC]
ESC A
Select Control-Value Data Type
Format: ESC @;n;
Allows the printer to accept certain parameters for the
ESC commands in either of two forms: binary or ASCII
character. When "n" is 1 (odd) ASCII is selected.
When "n" is (even) Binary is selected.
Note: See "Programming Considerations at the
Beginning of this section for a detailed explanation
of this command.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(64);CHR$(n);
Print All Characters
Format: ESC \ ;n -j ;n£;
Allows the printing of all characters. This includes
characters that are normally recognized by the printer as
control codes. This code (ESC \) allows the printer to print
the special symbols assigned to these ASCII values. If no
character is assigned to a decimal value received by the
printer, a space character is printed. No control code
functions are performed when this command is in effect.
n-j and n2 are binary numbers that specify the number
of characters to be printed. n-| represents values from
to 255, and n 2 represents values from to 255 times 256.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(92); CHR$(n 1 );CHR$(n 2 );
Reverse Line Feed
Causes the printer to move the paper down one line space as
defined by DIP Switch 2 or by printer control codes, ESC A
and ESC 2, ESC 0, ESC 1, or ESC 3.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(93);
Print Any Character
Allows the printer to print any character each time the
command is received. This includes characters
normally recognized by the printer as control codes. This
code (ESC A) allows the printer to print the special
symbols assigned to these ASCII values. If no character is
assigned to a decimal value received by the printer, a space
character is printed.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(94);
26 Color Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
FF Form Feed
Advances the paper to the next top-of-form position. The
top-of-form position is set by the position of the paper when
power is switched On, or by ESC 4, ESC C, or the
control- panel buttons. The next top-of-form is determined by
the form length defined by DIP Switch 6, ESC C, or ESC C 0.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(12);
HT Horizontal Tab
Moves the print head to the next horizontal tab stop. If the
next horizontal tab stop is beyond the right margin, the
character following HT is printed at the left margin. Tab
stops are set with ESC D. A tab stop every 8 columns is the
power-on default.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(9);
LF Line Feed
Advances the paper one linespace, as defined by DIP Switch 2
or by printer control codes; ESC A and ESC 2, ESC 0, ESC 1,
or ESC 3.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(10);
NUL Command End
Used with control commands as a command list terminator.
NUL is also used with other printer control codes to select
options.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(0);
SI Compressed Printing
Causes the printer to begin compressed printing. Character
spacing in compressed printing is 17.1 characters per Inch.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(15);
SO Double-Width Printing by Line
Causes the printer to start double-width printing.
Double-width printing prints the characters twice as wide as
the current character spacing. This results in half as many
characters per inch. A Carriage Return, Line Feed or DC4
(End Double-Width Printing by Line) cancels the SO command.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(14);
Color Printer 27
Printer
Code
Printer Function
VT
Vertical Tab
Advances the paper to the next vertical tab-stop position.
If the next vertical tabstop is beyond the bottom of the
page, the paper is placed at the first line of the next
page. If no vertical tab stops are set the VT command is
treated as a line-feed (LF) command.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(11);
28 Color Printer
Printer Control Code Quick Reference
This is an alphabetic listing of the descriptions of the printer
control codes. You will find it helpful in locating the code you
need to perform a certain job, or to determine the ASCII decimal
value quickly, once you are familiar with the control codes.
Note: ASCII values greater than 27 must be preceded by the
ESC code (ASCII value 27).
Description
Code
ASCII
Value
10 characters-per-inch print
DC2
18
12 characters-per-inch print
ESC:
58
17.1 characters-per-inch print
SI
15
Alarm
BEL
7
All-characters print
ESC\
92
Aspect ratio set
ESCn
110
Audible alarm
BEL
7
Auto justification On/Off
ESCM
77
Auto line feed On/Off
ESC 5
53
Auto perforation skip Off
ESCO
79
Auto perforation skip On
ESCN
78
Auto ribbon-band shift
ESC a
97
Auto ribbon shift
ESC a
97
Backspace
BS
8
Backspace n increments
ESCe
101
Backspace variable
ESCe
101
Band 1
ESCy
121
Band 2
ESCm
109
Band 3
ESCe
99
Band 4
ESCb
98
Bell
BEL
7
Black ribbon band
ESCb
98
Buzzer
BEL
7
Color Printer 29
Description
Cancel
Cancel auto line feed
Cancel data
Cancel double-strike printing
Cancel double-width by line
Cancel double-width printing (lines)
Cancel emphasized printing
Cancel perforation skip
Cancel proportional spacing
Cancel subscript
Cancel superscript
Carriage return
Change color
(see ribbon band desired)
Change printing quality
Character quality set
Character set 1 select
Character set 2 select
Character spacing, 12 per inch
Character spacing, 10 per inch
Character spacing, 17.1 per inch
Character under decimal 32, print
Characters under decimal 32, print
Clear data
Clear horizontal tabs
Clear tabs
Clear vertical tabs
Color band 1
Color band 2
Color band 3
Color band 4
Code
ASCII
Value
CAN
24
ESC 5
53
CAN
24
ESCH
72
DC4
20
ESCW
87
ESCF
70
ESCO
79
ESCP
80
ESCT
84
ESCT
84
CR
13
ESC I
73
ESC I
73
ESC 7
55
ESC 6
54
ESC:
58
DC2
18
SI
15
ESC a
94
ESC \
92
CAN
24
ESCR
82
ESCR
82
ESCR
82
ESCy
121
ESCm
109
ESCc
99
ESCb
98
30 Color Printer
Description
Command designator
Command end
Command prefix
Command start
Command terminator
Compressed On
Compressed print
Condensed print
Control-data value-type set
Data clear
Data-processing quality set
Data-value type set
Deselect printer
Deselect specific printer
Double-strike printing
Double-strike printing Off
Double-width-by-line Off
Double-width-by-line On
Double-width On/Off (lines)
Eject form
Eject paper
Emphasized printing
Emphasized printing Off
Escape
Feed line
Form feed
Form, set top of
Forward space variable
Graphics, 1108 bit-image
Graphics, 2216 bit-image, 1/2 speed
Graphics, 2216 bit-image, full speed
Code
ASCII
Value
ESC
27
NUL
ESC
27
ESC
27
NUL
SI
15
SI
15
SI
15
ESC@
64
CAN
24
ESC I
73
ESC@
64
DC3
19
ESCQ
81
ESCG
71
ESCH
72
DC4
20
SO
14
ESCW
87
FF
12
FF
12
ESCE
69
ESCF
70
ESC
27
LF
10
FF
12
ESC 4
52
ESCd
100
ESCK
75
ESCL
76
ESCY
89
Color Printer 31
Description
Code
ASCII
Value
Graphics, 4432 bit-image, 1/2 speed
ESCZ
90
Graphics, line-feed set
ESC 3
51
Head, home
ESC<
60
Home head
ESC<
60
Horizontal tab
HT
9
Horizontal tab stops set
ESCD
68
Incremental backspace
ESCe
101
Initialize function set
ESC?
63
Justification On/Off
ESCM
77
Length-of-page set in lines
ESCC
67
Length-of-page set in inches
ESC CO
67
Line-feed
LF
10
Line-feed, auto On/Off
ESC 5
53
Line-feed, reverse
ESC]
93
Line-feed, set 1/8 inch
ESCO
48
Line-feed, set 6/72 inch
ESC1
49
Line-feed, set graphics
ESC 3
51
Line-feed, store text
ESC A
65
Line-feed, start text
ESC 2
50
Line-feed, variable
ESC J
74
Margins set
ESCX
88
Near-letter quality, set
ESC I
73
Null
NUL
Page eject
FF
12
Page length, set in inches
ESC CO
67
Page length, set in lines
ESCC
67
Paper eject
FF
12
Perforation skip Off
ESCO
79
Perforation skip set
ESCN
78
Print all characters
ESC \
92
Print character under decimal 32
ESC a
94
32 Color Printer
Description
Code
ASCI]
Value
Print double-width one line
SO
14
Print double-width multiple lines
ESCW
87
Print emphasized
ESCE
69
Print emphasized Off
ESCF
70
Print quality set
ESC I
73
Print 10 characters per inch
DC2
18
Print 12 characters per inch
ESC:
58
Print unidirectional On/ Off
ESCU
85
Printer deselect
DC3
19
Printer deselect specific
ESCQ
81
Printer select
DC1
17
Proportional spacing On/Off
ESCP
80
Quality set
ESC I
73
Return carriage
CR
13
Reverse line feed
ESC]
93
Ribbon band 1
ESCy
121
Ribbon band 2
ESCm
109
Ribbon band 3
ESCc
99
Ribbon band 4
ESCb
98
Ribbon band auto shift
ESC a
97
Select character set 1
ESC 7
55
Select character set 2
ESC 6
54
Select color
(see ribbon band desired)
Select printer
DC1
17
Set 1 (character set 1)
ESC 7
55
Set 1/8-inch line feed
ESCO
48
Set 2 (character set 2)
ESC 6
54
Set 6/72-inch line feed
ESC1
49
Set aspect ratio
ESCn
110
Set data-processing quality
ESC I
73
Color Printer 33
Description
Set data- value type
Set graphics line feed
Set horizontal tab stops
Set initialize function
Set left margin
Set margins
Set near-letter quality
Set page length in lines
Set page length in inches
Set perforation skip
Set right margin
Set text quality
Set top-of-f orm
Set vertical tabs
Space forward variable
Specific printer deselect
Start 6/72 inch line feed
Start auto line feed
Start double-strike print
Start double-width print by line
Start double-width print (lines)
Start emphasized print
Start graphics line feed
Start perforation skip
Start proportional spacing
Start subscript
Start superscript
Start text line feed
Start underline
Stop auto line feed
Stop double-strike print
Code
ASCII
Value
ESC@
64
ESC 3
51
ESCD
68
ESC?
63
ESCX
88
ESCX
88
ESC I
73
ESCC
67
ESC CO
67
ESCN
78
ESCX
88
ESC I
73
ESC 4
52
ESCB
66
ESCd
100
ESCQ
81
ESC1
49
ESC 5
53
ESCG
71
SO
14
ESCW
87
ESCE
69
ESC 3
51
ESCN
78
ESCP
80
ESCS
83
ESCS
83
ESC 2
50
ESC-
45
ESC5
53
ESCH
72
34 Color Printer
Description
Code
ASCII
Value
Stop double- width by line
DC4
20
Stop double-width print (lines)
ESCW
87
Stop emphasized print
ESCF
70
Stop perforation skip
ESCO
79
Stop proportional spacing
ESCP
80
Stop subscript
ESCT
84
Stop superscript
ESCT
84
Stop underline
ESC-
45
Stops, horizontal tabs, set
ESCD
68
Stops, vertical tabs, set
ESCB
66
Store text line feed
ESC A
65
Subscript Off
ESCT
84
Subscript On
ESCS
83
Superscript Off
ESCT
84
Superscript On
ESCS
83
Tab horizontal
HT
9
Tab stops, horizontal, set
ESCD
68
Tab stops, vertical, set
ESCB
66
Tab vertical
VT
11
Tabs clear
ESCR
82
Tabs horizontal set
ESCD
68
Tabs vertical set
ESCB
66
Text line-feed store
ESC A
65
Text line-feed start
ESC 2
50
Text quality set
ESC I
73
Top-of-f orm set
ESC 4
52
Underline On/Off
ESC-
45
Unidirectional printing On/Off
ESCU
85
Variable backspace
ESCe
101
Variable forward space
ESCd
100
Variable line feed
ESC J
74
Vertical tabs set
ESCB
66
Vertical tab
VT
11
Color Printer 35
Printing in Color
The IBM Personal Computer Color Printer is capable of printing
in 8 colors when the process color ribbon is used. The 4 colors of
the ribbon are selected by: ESC b (Select Band 4) for black, ESC
c (Select Band 3) for cyan, ESC m (Select Band 2) for magenta,
and ESC y (Select Band 1) for yellow. You can print four
additional colors, orange, green, violet, and brown, by printing the
data twice. Print the data in one color and then print over the
data in a second color according to the table below. When
printing data twice to mix colors, always print the lighter color
first to avoid contaminating the ribbon.
Color Desired Ribbon Bands to Mix
Orange Bands 1 (ESC y) and 2 (ESC m)
Green Bands 1 (ESC y) and 3 (ESC c)
Violet Bands 2 (ESC m) and 3 (ESC c)
Brown Bands 2 (ESC m) and 4 (ESC b)
To mix colors, data must be sent to the printer in the following
order: printer control code to select the first color, data to be
printed, carriage return with no line feed, printer control code to
select the second color, repeat the data to be printed. For
example, to print "IBM Personal Computer" in green, you must;
select band 1 (yellow) with ESC y, print "IBM Personal
Computer ", return the carriage with no line feed with ASCII
decimal value 141 from "Character Set 1," select band 3 (cyan)
with ESC c, and print "IBM Personal Computer." To do this,
type the following:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(121); n IBM Personal
Computer f, ;CHR$(141);CHR$(27);CHR$(99;)"IBM Personal
Computer"
Note: The above example is for use with "Character Set 1."
36 Color Printer
Color Printer Character Set 1
NUL
12 3 4 5 6
© &V O £
1
BEL
8
BS
9
HT
10 11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18 19
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
►
DC1
DC2
DC3
20 21
22
23
24
25
26
27 28 29
DC4
§
-
I
CAN
i
ESC
L_
4 »
30 31
32
33
34
35
36
37 38 39
▲
▼
SP
!
/ /
#
$
%
&
f
40 41
42
43
44
45
46
47 48 49
(
)
*
+
/
■
/
1
50 51
52
53
54
55
56
57 58 59
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■
f
60 61
62
63
64
65
66
67 68 69
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
c
D
E
70 71
72
73
74
75
76
77 78 79
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
M
N
80 81
82
83
84
85
86
87 88 89
P
Q
R
s
T
u
V
w
X
Y
90 91
92
93
94
95
96
97 98 99
Z
[
\
]
S\
X
a
b
c
100 101
102
103
104
105
106
107 108 109
d
e
f
g
h
i
J
k
1
m
110 111
112
113
114
115
116
117 118 119
n
o
P
q
r
S
t
U
V
w
120 121
122
123
124
125
126
127 128 129
X
y
Z
[
I
1
]
r-f
NUL
u
Color Printer 37
Color Printer Character Set 1 (Continued)
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
e
a
a
a
o
a
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
140
141
142
143
144
145 146 147 148
149
FF
CR
SO
SI
E
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
O
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
U
U
CAN
ESC
X
¥
Pt
f
160
161
162
163
164
165 166
167
168
169
a
1
O
U
n
N
a
g
<L
r
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179
~l
Vl V
\ i
«
»:
■
|i|
I
180 181 IE
2 183 184 185 1
86 1 87
188 189
-
_IL
1
J
1
ii
J ■
1
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
J
1
-
I
200 201 202 203 204 2Q5 206 207 208 209
1Q
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219
t
h
a
220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229
am
a
r
TT
230
231
T
232
233
e
234
n
235
8
236
00
237
238
239
n
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
=
+
>
<
f
J
-^
«
o
•
250 251 252 253
254 255
•
-f
n
2
■
SP
38 Color Printer
Color Printer Character Set 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
8
9
NUL
©«90§0
BEL
BS
HT
10 11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18 19
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
►
DC1
DC2
DC3
20 21
22
23
24
25
26
27 28 29
DC4
§
-
1
CAN
1
ESC
l_
« »
30 31
32
33
34
35
36
37 38 39
▲
▼
SP
!
II
#
$
%
&
/
40 41
42
43
44
45
46
47 48 49
(
)
*
+
1
■
/
1
50 51
52
53
54
55
56
57 58 59
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
•
1
60 61
62
63
64
65
66
67 68 69
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
c
D
E
70 71
72
73
74
75
76
77 78 79
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
M
N
80 81
82
83
84
85
86
87 88 89
P
Q
R
s
T
u
V
w
X
Y
90 91
92
93
94
95
96
97 98 99
Z
[
\
]
/K
>
a
b
c
100 101
102
103
104
105
106
107 108 109
d
e
f
g
h
i
J
k
1
m
110 111
112
113
114
115
116
117 118 119
n
o
P
q
r
S
t
U
V
w
120 121
122
123
124
125
126
127 128 129
X
y
Z
1
I
I
}
/— '
Q
ii
Color Printer 39
Color Printer Character Set 2 (Continued)
130
131
132
133
1,34
135
136
137
138
139
e
si
a
a
a
O
a
Q
e
e
&
1
140
141
142
143
144
145 146
147
148
149
T
1
A
O
A
E
*
A
6
6
O
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
U
U
V
6
u
£
¥
Pt
f
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
a
1
O
U
h
N
a
g
i
r
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179
~l
V2
'/4
«
»
ID
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189
hi n Hi Mini
or
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
J
1
-
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209
T
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219
B
n
a
220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229
am
a
a
TT
230
231
T
232
233
e
234
n
235
8
236
00
237
238
e
239
n
240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249
=
±
>
<
J
-=-
«
o
■
250 251 252 253 254 255
-
4
n
2
■
SP
40 Color Printer
All Printable Characters
NUL
12 3 4 5 6
© e <? o% o
7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
BZ
9
J^
J
**
►
-
I
!!
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
<TT
§
-
I
t
1
-
-
i_
« »
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
A
▼
SP
!
# t
#
$
%
&
f
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
(
)
*
+
#
-
/
1
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
■
r
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
<
>
B
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
H
K
M
N
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
u
V
w
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99
\
100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109
m
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
n
u
w
120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129
( ! )
U
Color Printer 41
All Printable Characters (Continued)
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
*
e
a
a
a
o
a
Q
e
e
e
1
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
1
X
1
A
A
E
*
A
6
6
O
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
U
y
u
c
«£
¥
Pt
f
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
a
1
O
*
U
n
N
a
O
i
r
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179
~l
Vi
V4
i
«
»
TIT
■ ■■
■ ■■
■ ■■
■ ■■
■ ■■
1
I
180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189
-
=1
J
1
H
-II
190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 1
9
J
1
-
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209
T
L
210 211 212 213 214 2
B
n
15 216 217 218 219
a
220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229
BIB
a
ft
r
IT
230
231
T
232
233
e
234
n
235
8
236
00
237
238
e
239
n
240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249
=
±
>
<
J
o
•
250 251 252 253 254 255
•
■i
n
2
■
SP
42 Color Printer
DIP-Switch Settings
Many of the printer functions can be manually set with a
10-position dual in-line package (DIP) switch. Although these
same functions are programmable, the printer defaults to the
values set by the DIP switch.
The DIP switches must be set prior to switching the printer's
power to On. The printer logic reads the DIP-switch settings only
at power-on or printer initialization.
Note: Some programs use the control codes in Character Set
1 that have ASCII decimal values above 128. These control
codes are not in Character Set 2. The use of Character Set 2,
therefore, may not give the desired results with some
programs.
The charts on the following page describe the functions available
through the DIP-switch settings.
Switch Lever
Location of Printer DIP Switch
Color Printer 43
Switch
Setting
Function
1
On
Selects Character Set 2 (see "Character Set
2")(see "Note" below)
1
Off
Selects Character Set 1 (see "Character Set 1")
2
On
Sets line spacing to 8 lines per inch
2
Off
Sets line spacing to 6 lines per inch
3
On
Sets automatic 1-inch perforation skip
3
Off
No automatic perforation skip
4
On
Sets automatic line feed on carriage return
4
Off
No automatic line feed on carriage return
5
On
Sets printer to a 13.2-inch print line
5
Off
Sets printer to an 8-inch print line.
6
On
Selects 12-inch page length
6
Off
Selects 1 1 -inch page length
7
On
Sets automatic ribbon-band shift (use with
all-black ribbon)
7
Off
No automatic ribbon-band shift (use with color)
8
On
Does not allow audible alarm to sound
8
Off
Allows audible alarm to sound
DIP-Switch Settings — 1 Through 8
Switch 9
Switch 10
Quality and Spacing Set
Off
Off
Data processing quality, 1 2 characters per
inch, (see "Note" below)
Off
On
Data processing quality, 1 characters per
inch
On
Off
Text quality, 1 characters per inch
On
On
Near letter quality, 1 characters per inch
DIP-Switch Settings — 9 and 10
Switches 9 and 10 select the printing quality and character
spacing. See "ESC I" in "Printer Control Codes" for a
description of the printing qualities.
Note: When switches 9 and 10 are Off, the printer prints with
a 1-inch page length with no perforation skip. Switches 3 and
6 are overridden. This is the self -test setup.
44 Color Printer
Interface
Specifications:
• Data transfer rate: 1000 CPS (max.)
• Synchronization: By externally supplied STROBE pulses.
• Handshaking: -ACKNLG or +BUSY signals.
• Logic level: Input data and all interface control signals are
TTL-compatible.
• Connector type: 57-30360 (AMPHENOL), or equivalent,
36-pin connector on printer end of cable.
Data Transfer Sequence:
BUSY
0.5 |is (Minimum)
s 0.5 |is (Minimum)
Parallel Interface Timing Diagram
Color Printer 45
46 Color Printer
Specifications
Size
Height
24.4 cm (10 in.)
Width
57.8 cm (22.75 in.)
Depth
35.43 cm (14 in.)
Weight
18.4 kg (40 lb)
Power Cable
Length
1.98 m (6.5 ft)
Size
28 AWG
Signal Cable
Length
1.89 m (6 ft)
Size
3 by 18 AWG
Physical Specifications
Voltage (Vac)
Frequency
(Hz)
Current
(Amps)
Power
(Watts)
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
±3 Hz
Maximum
Maximum
100
90
118
50/60
1.5
135
120
102
139
60
1.5
135
200
180
236
50/60
1.0
135
220
190
264
50/60
1.0
135
Electrical Specifications
Color Printer 47
Print Method
Wire matrix
Print Speed
Data Processing Quality
200 cps
Text Quality
110 to 150 cps
Near Letter Quality
30 to 40 cps
Print Direction
Bidirectional with logic seeking
Number of Pins in Head
9 (4- and 5-column arrangement)
Size of Pins in Head
.356-mm (0.01 4-in.) wire diameters
Line Spacing
4.23 mm (1 /6 in.) or programmable
Printing Characteristics
Matrices
Data processing: 9x9
Text: 24x9
Near- letter: 36 x 18
Block graphic: 24 x 14
Character Sets
See "Color Printer Character Sets" 1
and 2.
Printing Sizes
Maximum
Characters characters
per inch per line
Normal
10 132
Double Width
5 66
Compressed
17.1 225.7
Double Width-Compressed
13.3 175.5
Proportional
1 2 (average) 1 58.4 (average)
Subscript
10 132
Superscript
10 132
Media Handling
Paper Feed
Forms tractor feed and friction feed
Speed
127 mm (5.0 in.) per second
Paper Width Range
Forms tractor feed
76.2 to 406.4 mm (3 to 16 in.)
Friction feed
177.8 to 304.8 mm (7 to 12 in.)
(216to432mm(8.5to17in.)
adjustable length)
Paper Weight
Continuous forms
Single part: 1 5 to 20 lb bond
Multipart: 1 2 to 1 5 lb, 6 to 8 lb carbon
Single sheet
1 5 to 20 lb bond
Printer Specifications (Part 1 of 2)
48 Color Printer
Media Handling (continued)
Copies
Continuous forms
1 to 4 parts
Single sheet
1 part only
Paper Path
Continuous forms
Front, bottom, and rear
Single sheet
Front
Interfaces
Standard parallel 8-bit
Data and Control lines
Inked Ribbon
Type
Cartridge (all ribbons)
Color
Process Ribbon
COLOR BAND
Yellow 1
Magenta 2
Cyan 3
Black 4
Primary Ribbon
COLOR BAND
Red 1
Green 2
Blue 3
Black 4
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature
10to40°C(50to104°F)
Operating Humidity
10 to 80% non-condensing
Heat Output
140 BTU/hr (maximum)
Memory Allocation
Internal
2K bytes
Data
6K bytes
Reserved
8K bytes
Total
16K bytes
Printer Specifications (Part 2 of 2)
Color Printer 49
Connector Pin Assignments
Printer connector-pin assignments and descriptions of signals are
provided in the following chart.
Connector Pin Assignment
Signal Pin
No.
Signal
Description
1
-STROBE
-STROBE pulse to read data in. Pulse width
must be more than 0. 5[is at receiving
terminal. The signal level is normally
high (logical 1 ); data is read at the
low (logical 0) level.
2
DATA1
These signals represent
information of the 1 st
to 8th bits of parallel
data respectively.
3
DATA 2
4
DATA 3
5
DATA 4
6
DATA 5
7
DATA 6
8
DATA 7
9
DATA 8
10
-ACKNLG
Approx. 0.5|is pulse. A low signal
indicates that the printer is ready to
accept other data.
11
+ BUSY
A high signal indicates that the printer
cannot receive data. The signal becomes
high in the following cases:
1 . During data entry
2. During printing operation
3. In offline state
4. During printer error status
12
+ PE
A high signal indicates that the printer is
out of paper.
13
+ SLCT
(ENABLE)
A high signal indicates that the remote
control select feature has not deselected
the printer. The signal level goes high
upon going ready or receiving a DC 1
(SELECT). If currently ready but
deselected, it goes low upon
receiving a DC 3 (DESELECT).
14
-AUTO
FEED
Not used
15
Not used
16
Ov
Logic GND level.
Connector Pin Assignment (Part 1 of 2)
50 Color Printer
Connector Pin Assignment
Signal Pin
No.
Signal
Description
17
CHASSIS
GND
Printer chassis ground (GND). In the
printer, the chassis GND and the logic
GND are isolated from each other.
18
Not used
19-30
GND
TWISTED-PAIR RETURN logic GND
level.
31
-INIT
When the level of this signal becomes
low, the printer controller is reset to
its initial state, and the print buffer is
cleared. This signal is normally at high
level, and its pulse width must be more
than 50 [is at the receiving terminal.
32
-ERROR
The level of this signal becomes low
when the printer is in:
1 . Paper Out state
2. Offline state
3. Error state
33
GND
TWISTED-PAIR return logic GND level.
34
Not used
35
Not used
36
Not used
Connector Pin Assignment (Part 2 of 2)
Notes:
1. All interface conditions are based on TTL-level signals. The
rise and fall time of each signal must be less than 0.2
microseconds.
2. Data must not be transmitted until the -ACKNLG signal and
+BUSY signal go low.
Color Printer 51
52 Color Printer
o
o
ST
+ 5Vo C24 .1
T2o ll ioT
•01|i/j
C28 &\\lf
EC
IS74A
>CLK i
GNDCL
^C7 i:C6
T.om/ X 2 "
TO CONTROLLER PCB
L23 1
NOTES:
1 - ALL RESISTORS ARE W 5%, CF.
r
o
so
3
HIGHEST DESIGNATIONS
P3,U5,R7,CR1.
C28. 01, XI
MISSING DESIGNATIONS
C2AC10 23.C26
Color Printer — I/O Board (Sheet 1 of 1)
en
©
<1
MOTOR. DC-PERM. MAGNET
O E5 — (h
Color Printer — Color Shift (Sheet 1 of 1)
o
ST
en
NOTES:
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED; ALL RESISTANCE VALUES
ARE IN OHMS. CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS.
2. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL RESISTORS ARE V W.
5%, CF.
3. ZERO OHM RESISTORS (NOT SHOWN) ARE R1 R6 & R9.
4. A BAR ON TOP OF A CHARACTER ON SW 1 MEANS THAT THE
CONDITION EXIST WHEN THAT DIP SWITCH IS SET TO "ON"
5. DIP SWITCH 1
SW9 SW1Q FONT
OFF OFF DPO, 12 CPI. 1 " FORM LENGTH
OFF ON DPO, 10 CPI
ON OFF TEXT QUALITY, 10 CPI
ON ON LETTER QUALITY, 10 CPI
Color Printer — Control Panel (Sheet 1 of 1)
On
n
2T
- IU15.U16.U22.U23.SHT 11)
VOLTAGE
MIN
MAX
+ 14V
+ 10V
+ 17V
-14V
-10V
-17V
+ 9V
+ 7V
+ 13V
+ 40V
+ 29V
+ 50V
+ 5V
+ 4.86V
+ 5.15V
Color Printer — Controller Board (Sheet 1 of 3)
ft
©
»1
en
-a
Color Printer — Controller Board (Sheet 2 of 3)
111111111111111111
Color Printer — Controller Board (Sheet 3 of 3)
Index
All Printable Characters 41
ASCII values 29
B
block diagram 2
codes (printer control quick reference) 29
color control mechanism 5
Color Printer Character Set 1 37
Color Printer Character Set 2 39
color printing 36
connector type 45
control codes (quick reference) 29
controller subsystem 3
D
data direction register 6
data register 6
Index- 1
data transfer rate 45
description 1
DIP-switch settings 43
E
Expanded Multiplexed mode 7
H
handshaking 45
I
I/O subsystem 3
interface 45
L
logic level 45
M
major subsystems 3
microprocessor 6
Index-2
MPU (microprocessor unit) 6
paper feed 5
parallel interface 45
print head 4
print subsystem 4
print wires 4
Printable Characters (All) 41
printer control code quick reference 29
printing in color 36
process color ribbon 36
quick reference (printer control codes) 29
R
ribbon feed 5
switch settings (DIP switches) 43
synchronization 45
Index-3
Index-4
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM PC Compact
Printer
6361476
Contents
Description 1
Programming Considerations 3
Printer Control Codes 3
Printer Control Code Quick Reference 10
Print Mode Combinations 11
Compact Printer Character Set 12
Interface 15
Specifications 17
Logic Diagram 21
hi
IV
Description
The IBM PC Compact Printer is a stand-alone, tabletop unit that
plugs into a standard, 120- Vac wall outlet. Using a print head
with eight print elements and thermal-sensitive paper, the printer
can print characters from the standard ASCII, 96-character,
uppercase and lowercase character set, and prints the characters
in a 5-by-8 dot matrix at 50 characters per second (cps). The
printer prints in one direction (left-to-right) and has four print
modes. In the standard mode, the printer prints 80 characters per
line; in the compressed mode, 136 characters per line; in the
double-width mode, 40 characters per line, and in the compressed
double-width mode, 66 characters per line. The IBM PC
Compact Printer can also underline characters, has an extended
character set for international languages, and can accept special
characters in all-points-addressable mode to do graphics or draw
special characters under program control.
The printer has a 1.89 meter (6-foot), 16-lead, printer cable.
This cable connects to the 25 -pin D-shell connector of an
Asynchronous Communications Adapter (primary or alternate)
through the use of the IBM PC Compact Printer Connector
Adapter.
Compact Printer 1
The following is a block diagram of the IBM PC Compact Printer.
P17
P30-37
<
P10-13
P16
MPU
HD6801
V5
P46 4
P47 4
P40-44
P23 4
P15
+ V H "
VOLTAGE
REG. AND
SAFETY
LOGIC
ADR/DATA BUS
C>
DATA LATCH
SN74LS273
\ HEAD DRIVER *\
^/ ULN2803A —*/
THERMAL
HEAD
V
1=3 X-TAL
HT 4.91 MHz
^
ADDRESS
LATCH
SN74LS373
HIGH ORDER ADDRESS
DRIVER/
RECEIVER
T
+12V -12V
Compact Printer Block Diagram
-¥ TO LED
FROM LF KEY
FROM HOME
POSITION SWITCH
:>
£
11
2KB
STATIC-RAM
HM6116
RD
TO IBM PC
-►CTS
2 Compact Printer
Programming Considerations
Printer Control Codes
The following pages list, in alphabetic order, the printer control
codes with a description of each. Some knowledge of BASIC
programming is necessary to insert printer control codes in your
program. An example of each code in BASIC is given at the end
of each description. The "Format" information is given where
more information is needed for programming considerations.
Compact Printer 3
Printer
Code
Printer Function
CAN
CR
DC2
DC4
ESC
Cancel
Clears the printer memory of all data waiting to be printed
following the last- received line-ending code. Resets the
printer to the power-on defaults.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(24);
Carriage Return
Causes the printer to print the data that follows CR
beginning at the left margin. No line-feed operation takes
place unless ESC 5;1 (Automatic Line- Feed) has been sent.
Notes:
1 . IBM Personal Computer BASIC (and many other
programs) automatically sends LF (line feed) with CR.
2. If no data precedes the CR, or if all
preceding data is spaces, the printer does not
carriage return. If automatic line feed is On,
the paper is advanced one line space.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(13);
Device Control 2 (Compressed Off)
Ends printing in the Compressed mode.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(18);
Device Control 4 (Double Width Off)
Ends printing in the Double Width mode.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(20);
Escape
Sets the printer to accept the next data sent as a printer
command. (See the following list.)
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);
4 Compact Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC B Escape B (Set Vertical Tabs)
Format: ESC B;n<|;n 2 ;...n64;NUL;
Sets the vertical tab-stop positions. The power-on default
is no vertical tab stops set. n-j through n^
represent tab-stop positions by line number. The topmost
line of the page is line 0. Tab-stop positions must be
received in ascending numeric order and cannot exceed the set
page length. Up to 64 positions are recognized by the
Compact Printer. The positions do not take effect until NUL
is received. Once vertical tab stops are set, they remain in
effect until new ones are specified or all tab stops are set
to the power-on defaults by ESC R (Clear Tabs). (If the
printer is reset or switched Off, set tab stops are cleared.)
If no vertical tab stops are set, the Vertical Tab (VT)
command behaves as a Line Feed (LF) command. ESC B
followed only by NUL clears all vertical tab stops. The
form length must be set by the ESC C command (Set Lines
per Page) prior to setting vertical tab stops.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(66);CHR$(n 1 );
CHR$(n 2 );...CHR$(n 64 );CHR$(0);
ESC C Escape C (Set Lines per Page)
Format: ESC C;n;
Sets the page length in number of lines (n). The ESC C
command must be followed by a value to specify the length of
page desired. (Maximum form length for the printer is 127
lines.) The printer default is 66 lines per page when
switched On or reset.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(67);CHR$(n);
ESC D Escape D (Set Horizontal Tab Stops)
Format: ESC D;n-|;n 2 ;...n 28 ;NUL;
Sets the horizontal tab-stop positions represented by n-j
through n 28 . The power-on default is a tab stop set at
column 8 and every eighth column thereafter. The printer
recognizes up to 28 horizontal tab stops. They must be in
ascending numeric order and followed by NUL. Tab stops can
be set between 1 and 80 in standard print mode; between 1 and
136 in compressed print mode. ESC D immediately followed by
NUL will clear all horizontal tabs. ESC R (Clear Tabs) may be
used to set horizontal tabs to the power-on default.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(68);CHR$( ni );
CHR$(n 2 );...CHR$(n 28 );CHR$(0);
Compact Printer 5
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESCK
Escape K (560 Bit-Image Graphics Mode)
Format: ESC K;ni;n2;vi;v2;...V56o;
Changes the printer to the Bit- Image Graphics mode. Dot
density is 70 by 70 dots per inch. If the graphics data
exceeds the space remaining on the line, the printer ignores
the excess data. 7 bytes of bit- image data equal 1
standard-width character.
n-| and n 2 are binary numbers that specify the number
of bit- image data bytes to be transferred. n<| represents
values from to 255, and n 2 represents values from to
2 times 256. The total number of bit- image data bytes is
equal to ni + (n2 x 256) and cannot exceed 560.
All eight of the print-head thermal dots are used to print
bit-image graphics. v-| through V560 are bit- image data
bytes, each of which represents a set of 8 printable dots in
a vertical line. The horizontal position of these 8 dots is
determined by the position of the bit- image data byte within
the vi through V560 series. v<| is printed at the starting
position followed in order from left to right by
v 2 through v 5 6o-
Each bit of a bit- image data byte represents a vertical dot
position at the horizontal position represented by that
bit-image data byte. The lowest value, or least significant
bit (bit 0), represents the bottom dot position, and the
highest value, or most significant bit (bit 7), represents
the top dot position.
In the following table the left-hand column of (»)'s
represents dot positions within a vertical line. The
right-hand column shows the corresponding bit number within
a bit-image data byte. (The bits are numbered 7 through 0,
from left to right.)
Dot Position
Bit Number
Top
•
_
7
•
-
6
•
-
5
•
-
4
•
-
3
•
-
2
•
-
1
Bottom
•
-
For example, if v<| is binary 10000000 (decimal 128), only
the top dot prints in that horizontal position; if v<| is
binary 00000001 (decimal 01), only the bottom dot prints; and
if v<j is binary 11111111 (decimal 255), all eight dots print.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(75);CHR$(n 1 );
CHR$(n 2 );CHR$(v 1 );CHR$(v 2 ); ... CHR$(v 560 );
6 Compact Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC N Escape N (Set Skip Perforation)
Format: ESC N;n;
Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of
each page. This causes the printer to automatically skip
over the perforation between pages of continuous forms. The
number of lines n, is converted to inches using the
line-spacing in effect. The value of n must be between 1 and
127. ESC N must be reset anytime the page length (ESC C) is
changed. The default for skip perforation is 25.4 mm (1 in.).
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(27);CHR$(78);CHR$(n);
ESC O Escape O (Cancel Skip Perforation)
Cancels the Skip Perforation function.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(79);
ESC R Escape R (Clear Tabs)
Resets all tab stops, both horizontal and vertical, to the
power-on defaults.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(82);
ESC W Escape W (Continuous Double-Width Print)
Format: ESC W;n;
Changes the printer to double-width printing when ESC W is
followed by 1 . This mode is not canceled by a line feed or
DC4. It is canceled when ESC W is followed by (zero).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(87);CHR$(n);
ESC Escape Zero (1/9-Inch Line Feed)
Changes the line feed to 2.82 mm (1 /9 in.). This produces 9
lines per inch.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(48);
ESC1 Escape One (1/9-Inch Line Feed)
Changes the line feed to 2.82 mm (1 /9 in.). This produces 9
lines per inch. ESC 1 functions the same as ESC 0.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(49);
ESC 2 Escape Two (1/6-Inch Line Feed)
Resets line spacing to 4.23 mm (1 /6 in.). This
produces 6 lines per inch and is the power-on default for
vertical line spacing.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(50);
Compact Printer 7
Printer
Code
Printer Function
ESC 5
ESC-
ESC<
FF
HT
LF
NUL
Automatic Line Feed
Format: ESC 5;n;
When n is 1, automatic line feeding starts; the printer will
line-feed each time a code that indicates the end of a line,
such as CR, is received. When n is 0, automatic line feeding
stops.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(53);
Escape Minus (Underline)
Format: ESC-;n;
ESC - followed by 1, causes all of the following data
to be printed with an underline. ESC - followed by
(zero), cancels the underlining.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR(45);CHR$(n);
Escape Less Than (Home Head)
Returns the print head to the left margin to print the line
following ESC <. This occurs for one line only.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(60);
Form Feed
Advances the paper to the top of the next page. The location
of the paper, when the printer Power switch is set to On,
is the top-of-page position. The next top-of-page
is determined by the form length as defined by the power-on
default, 279 mm (1 1 in.), or as set by ESC C. Always
separate multiple Form Feed commands with spaces.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(12);
Horizontal Tab
Causes the carriage to move to the next horizontal tab stop.
Tab stops are set with ESC D. A horizontal tab stop every 8
columns is the power-on default.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(9);
Line Feed
Advances the paper one line space. Line spacing is 4.23 mm
(1 /6 in.) unless reset by ESC 0, ESC 1, or ESC 2.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(10);
Null
Used with control commands as a command list terminator.
NUL is also used with some printer control codes to
select options.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(0);
8 Compact Printer
Printer
Code
Printer Function
SI Shift In (Compressed On)
Causes the printer to begin compressed printing. This
command is canceled by DC2 (Compressed Off).
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(15);
SO Shift Out (Double Width)
Causes the printer to start double-width printing.
Double-width printing prints the characters twice as wide as
the current character spacing. This results in half as many
characters per inch. A Carriage Return, Line Feed or DC4
(Double Width Off) cancels the SO command.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(14);
VT Vertical Tab
Advances the paper to the next vertical tab-stop position. If
no vertical tab stops are set, the VT command is treated as a
line-feed (LF) command. Vertical tab stops are set with
ESCB.
Example:
LPRINTCHR$(11);
Compact Printer 9
Printer Control Code Quick Reference
Note: ASCII values greater than 27 must be preceded by the
ESC code (ASCII value 27).
Description
Code
ASCII
Value
Cancel
DC2
24
Carriage return
CR
13
Compressed character off
DC2
18
Double width off
DC4
20
Escape
ESC
27
Vertical tab set
ESCB
66
Lines per page set
ESCC
67
Horizontal tab stops set
ESCD
68
Graphics mode (bit-image)
ESCK
75
Skip perforation
ESCN
78
Cancel skip perforation
ESCO
79
Tabs clear
ESCR
82
Double width (multiple lines)
ESCW
87
Line feed (2.82 mm (1/9 in.))
ESCO
48
Line feed (2.82 mm (1/9 in.))
ESC 1
49
Line feed (4.23 mm (1/6 in.))
ESC 2
50
Line feed (automatic)
ESC 5
53
Underline
ESC-
45
Home head
ESC<
60
Form feed
FF
12
Tab (horizontal)
HT
9
Line feed
LF
10
Null
NUL
Compressed character
SI
15
Double width
SO
14
Tab (vertical)
VT
11
10 Compact Printer
Print Mode Combinations
The following figure shows the print-mode combinations possible
with the IBM PC Compact Printer. Modes shown with XXX in
the same column can be combined.
A print mode can be changed at any time within a line; however,
the double- width mode affects the entire line.
Allowable Mode Combinations
Standard
XXX
Compressed
XXX
XXX
XXX
Double-Width
XXX
XXX
XXX
Underline
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
Allowable Mode Combinations
Compact Printer 1 1
Compact Printer Character Set
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NUL
V ♦**
•I
1 HT
10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17
18 19
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
»►
-
DC2
• •
20. 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29
DC4
*?
-
i
CAN
1
-
ESC
L
«-*
30 31 32 33 34 35
36 37 38 39
SP
|
# 1
#
$
0/
/o
&
t
40 41 42 43 44 45
46 47 48 49
(
)
*
+
1
•
/
1
50 51 52 53 54 55
56 57 58 59
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
;
i
60 61 62 63 64 65
66 67 68 69
<
—
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
70 71 72 73 74 75
76 77 78 79
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
M
N
80 81 82 83 84 85
86 87 88 89
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
90 91 92 93 94 95
96 97 98 99
z
[
\
]
A
>
a
b
c
100 101 102 103 104 105
106 107 108 109
d
e
f
g
h
i
J
k
1
m
110 111 112 113 114 115
116 117 118 119
n
o
P
q
r
s
t
u
V
w
120 121 122 123 124 125
126 127 128 129
X
y
z
[
i
i
]
r+*
DEL
9
u
12 Compact Printer
Compact Printer Character Set (continued)
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
e
a
a
a
o
a
Q
e
e
e
1
140
141
142
143
144
145
146 147
148
149
T
1
A
o
A
E
ae
A
o
6
O
150
151
152
153
154
155
156 157
158
159
u
U
y
6
u
c
£
¥
Pt
f
160
161
162
163
164
165
166 167
168
169
*
a
#
1
r
O
u
n
N
a
g
L
-
170
171
172
173
174
175
176 177
178
179
-»
X
X
1
1
«
»
"
180
181
182
183
184
185
186 187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196 197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206 207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216 217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226 227
228
229
a
P
r
TT
V
a
230
231
232
233
234
235
236 237
237
239
M
r
$
e
n
8
00
€
n
240
241
242
243
244
245
246 247
248
249
=
±
>
<
f
J
~i"
«
o
■
250
251
252
253
254
255
-
>r
n
2
■
SP
Compact Printer 13
14 Compact Printer
Interface
Specifications:
• Data transfer rate: 1200 bps (maximum)
• Synchronization: Internal clocking
. Handshaking: CTS (Clear to Send) Pacing
• Logic level: Input data and all interface control signals are
EIA levels
Serial Interface Timing Diagram
Character Period
Received
Data
One
Start
Bit
Two
Stop
Bits
High (Ready)
RDY Low (Busy)
Compact Printer Serial Interface Timing Diagram
DSR
Compact Printer 15
16 Compact Printer
Specifications
Size
Height
88.9 mm (3.5 in)
Width
312.4 mm (12.3 in)
Depth
221 mm (8.7 in)
Weight
3.0 kg (6.6 lb)
Power Cable
Length
1.98 m (6.5 ft)
Size
28AWG
Signal Cable
Length
1.89 m (6 ft)
Size
3 by 18AWG
Physical Specifications
Voltage (Vac)
Frequency
(Hz)
Current
(Amps)
Power
(Watts)
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
±3 Hz
Maximum
Maximum
120
108
132
60
0.25
36
Electrical Specifications
Compact Printer 17
Print Method
Thermal, non-impact, dot-matrix
Print Speed
50 cps
Print Direction
Left to right only
Print Elements in
Head
8
Line Spacing
4.23 mm (1 /6 in.) or 2.82 mm (1 /9 in.)
Printing Characteristics
Matrix
Character Set
Graphics
5x8
See "Compact Printer Character Set"
tables.
APA (All Points Addressable)
Printing Sizes
Normal
Double Width
Compressed
Double Width-
Compressed
Maximum
Characters characters
per inch per line
10 80
5 40
17.5 136
8.75 66
Media Handling
Paper Feed
Paper Width
Copies
Paper Path
Friction feed
216 mm (8-1/2 in.)
Single sheet only
Top
Interface
Serial data and control lines
Print Color
Black
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
5to40°C(41 to 104°F)
10 to 80% non-condensing
Heat Output
54.6 BTU/hr (maximum)
Printer Specifications
18 Compact Printer
00 00 00 1
000000I
End of Printer Cable
Pin
Description
Pin
A04
4
Not Used
1
( 4
Transmitted Data
2
J *
A08
Receive Data
3
; I
A03
^Request To Send
4
A07
Clear To Send
5>
) \
A06 ^
Data Set Ready
w
6 >
c
t
B02
Signal Ground
7
B03
fc
Received Line Signal Detector
8
B04
IBM PC
Compact
Printer
Connector
Adapter
+ Transmit Current Loop Data
w
9
B05
Not Used
10
IBM PC
B06
-Transmit Current Loop Data
11
Asynchronous
Compact
B07
Not Used
12
Communication
Printer
Cable
B08
Not Used
13
Adapter
A05
Not Used
14
(RS-232C)
\
w
Not Used
15
A02
Not Used
16
Not Used
17
+ Receive Current Loop Data
18
Not Used
19
Data Terminal Ready
20
A01
Not Used
Not Used
21
Ring Indicator
22
Not Used
23
B01
Not Used
24
Not L
1st
jd
Receive Current Loop Return
25
Note: An IBM PC Compact Printer Connector (as shown in the diagram above) is
required to connect the Compact Printer to an IBM Asynchronous
Communications Adapter (primary or alternate).
Compact Printer 19
20 Compact Printer
<&
**
K>
e.z 3*»r
~@£T
-&-
o
GFQ
fid
3
Compact Printer (Sheet 1 of 1)
Notes:
22 Compact Printer
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM 5-1/4" Diskette
Drive
6361486
Contents
Description 1
Specifications 3
Logic Diagrams 5
ui
IV
Description
The system unit has space and power for one or two 5-1/4 inch
diskette drives. A drive can be single-sided or double-sided with
40 tracks for each side. The diskette drive is a self-contained unit
consisting of a spindle drive system, a read positioning system,
and a read/write/erase system.
The diskette drive uses modified frequency modulation (MFM) to
read and write digital data, with a track-to-track access time of 6
milliseconds.
The IBM 5-1/4" Diskette Drive uses a standard 133.4 millimeter
(5.25 inch) diskette. Single-sided, double-density, soft-sectored
diskettes are used for single-sided drives. Double-sided drives use
double-sided, double-density, soft-sectored diskettes.
This recording medium is a flexible magnetic disk enclosed in a
protective jacket. The protected disk, free to rotate within the
jacket, is continuously cleaned by the soft fabric lining of the
jacket during normal operation. Read/write/erase head access is
made through an opening in the jacket. Openings for the drive
hub and diskette index hole are also provided. The following
figure is a simplified drawing of the diskette used with the IBM
5-1/4" Diskette Drive.
3.56 mm , , 6 - 30 ± °-25 mm Qxide Coated
(0.140 in.) "^j p r (0 ' 25 ± ° 01 ,nJ M Y |ar ™ Disk
133.4 mm
(5.25 in.)
I
Recording Medium
II
£j o 133.4 mm
Sealed
Protective
Jacket
+i
+i
(5.25 in.]
Liner
Spindle
Access
Hole
Index Hole
Head
Aperture
Diskette Drive 1
To insert a diskette, the operator raises the latch at the front of
the diskette drive and inserts the diskette in the slot. Plastic
guides in the slot ensure the diskette is in the correct position.
Closing the latch centers the diskette and clamps it to the drive
hub. After 250 milliseconds, the servo-controlled dc motor starts
and drives the hub at a constant speed of 300 rpm. The head
positioning system, which consists of a 4-phase stepper-motor and
band assembly with its associated electronics, moves the magnetic
head so it comes in contact with the desired track of the diskette.
The stepper-motor and band assembly uses one-step rotation to
cause a one-track linear movement of the magnetic head. No
operator intervention is required during normal operation. During
a write operation, a 0.33-millimeter (0.013-inch) data track is
recorded, then tunnel-erased to 0.30 millimeter (0.012 inch). If
the diskette is write-protected, a Write Protect sensor disables the
drive's circuitry, and an appropriate signal is sent to the interface.
Data is read from the diskette by the data-recovery circuitry,
which consists of a low-level read amplifier, differentiator,
zero-crossing detector, and digitizing circuits. All data decoding
is done by the adapter card.
The diskette drive also has the following sensor systems:
1. The Track 00 switch, which senses when the head/carriage
assembly is at track 00.
2. The Index sensor, which consists of an LED light source and
phototransistor. This sensor is positioned to generate a digital
signal when an index hole is detected.
3. The Write Protect sensor disables the diskette drive's
electronic circuits whenever a write-protect tab is applied to
the diskette.
For interface information and programming considerations, refer
to "IBM 5-1/4" Diskette Drive Adapter" in this manual.
2 Diskette Drive
Specifications
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
86 mm (3.4 in.)
149 mm (5.9 in.)
203 mm (8.0 in.)
Weight
2.04 kg (4.5 lb)
Power
+12 Vdc ±5%, (900 mA average)
+5 Vdc ±5%, (600 mA average)
Media
Industry-compatible 5-1/4 inch diskette
Tracks per Inch
48
Number of Tracks
40
Temperature
(exclusive of media)
Operating
Non-operating
10to44°C(50to112°F)
-40to60°C(-40to140°F)
Relative humidity
(exclusive of media)
Operating
Non-operating
20 to 80% (non-condensing)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Seek Time
6 ms track-to-track
Head Settling Time
1 5 ms (last track addressed)
Error Rate
Recoverable
Irrecoverable
Seek Errors
1 per 1 9 bits read
1 per 10 12 bits read
1 per 1 6 seeks
Hem Life
20,000 hours (normal use)
Media Life
3.0 X 10 6 passes per track
Disk Speed
Long term
Instantaneous
300rpm± 1.5%
300rpm±3.0%
Start Time
500 ms (maximum)
Transfer Rate
250K bps
Recording Mode
MFM
Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
Diskette Drive 3
4 Diskette Drive
7?
REF DES
LAST USED
REF DES
NOT USED
L3
C41
C24
R15
08
CR21
R46
R67
R69
C31
-*vTc36 Xci8.C19.C35
~ 4.7 T.0 1
+J-M1 J-p;
T 4.7 T C27-29. C32-34 T J 3 . 8
©
T C26.C30.
- C38.C39
r
o
p
era
B
5-1/4 Inch Diskette Drive — Type 1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
ON
D
2. ALL CAPS ARE IN ^FD.
3. ALL DIODES ARE IN 4446.
4. ALL TRANSISTORS NPN ARE 2n41 24 &
PNPARE2N4125.
5-1/4 Inch Diskette Drive - Type 1 (Sheet 2 of 3)
-TACH
+TACH
R2 i
1M <
IK POT. 1K.1%
> M9
• : 470n
H^<
&
^^-PART0FP2
+MOTOR POWER
4 N MOTOR ON
«5
7?
ft
a
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. RESISTORS ARE IN OHMS. +5%. 1/4W.
2. 1% RESISTORS ARE 1/8W.
3. CAPACITORS ARE IN pf. +20%. 35V.
5-1/4 Inch Diskette Drive - Type 1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
<
00
o
53"
J- C28
"=" 6V. 20%
5-1/4 Inch Diskette Drive — Type 2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
00
"^
o
—
00
4t
t
I
5-1 /4 Inch Diskette Drive - Type 2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
♦HV>-
I
a
I
00
©
00
5-1/4 Inch Diskette Drive - Type 3 (Sheet 1 of 3)
o
00
' —
o
00
t
a
I
5-1 /4 Inch Diskette Drive - Type 3 (Sheet 2 of 3)
fcs>
s
©
00
©
5-1 /4 Inch Diskette Drive - Type 3 (Sheet 3 of 3)
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Slimline Diskette
Drive
6361484
Contents
Description 1
Specifications 5
Logic Diagrams 7
m
IV
Description
The IBM Portable Personal Computer has space and power for
one or two 5-1/4 inch slimline diskette drives. Each drive can
use single-sided or double-sided diskettes with 40 tracks on each
side. The drive is completely self contained, and consists of a
spindle drive system, a head positioning system, and a
read/write/erase system.
The recording medium is a flexible magnetic disk enclosed in a
protective jacket. The protected disk, free to rotate within the
jacket, is continuously cleaned by the soft fabric lining of the
jacket during normal operation. Read/write/erase head access is
made through an opening in the jacket. Openings for the drive
hub and diskette index hole are also provided. The following
figure is a simplified drawing of the diskette used with the IBM
5-1/4 Diskette Drive.
3.56 mm ,, 6.30 ± 0.25 mm
(0.140in.)H|*T ,0 - 25±00lin - )
1 ' * Sealed
Protective
Jacket
?:°i
U
in g 133.4 mm
2 « (5.25 in.l
"\ oo
Liner
Oxide Coated
Mylar™ Disk
(5.25 in.)
I
Recording Medium
Spindle
Access Head
Hole Aperture
Index Hole
Slimline Diskette Drive 1
To load a diskette, the operator twists the latch at the front of the
diskette drive counter-clockwise and inserts the diskette into the
slot. Plastic guides in the slot ensure the diskette is in the correct
position. Twisting the latch clockwise centers the diskette and
clamps it to the drive hub. After 250 milliseconds, the
servo-controlled dc motor starts and drives the hub at a constant
speed of 300 rpm.
The diskette drive uses modified frequency modulation (MFM) to
read and write digital data with a track to track access time of 6
milliseconds. It reaches operating speed in 0.5 seconds and drives
the hub at a constant 300 rpm.
The head positioning system, which consists of a 4-phase
stepper-motor and band assembly with its associated electronics,
moves the magnetic head so it comes in contact with the desired
track of the diskette. The stepper-motor and band assembly uses
one-step rotation to cause a one-track linear movement of the
magnetic head. No operator intervention is required during
normal operation. During a write operation, a 0.33 millimeter
(0.013-inch) data track is recorded, then tunnel-erased to 0.30
millimeter (0.012 inch). If the diskette is write-protected, a
write-protect sensor disables the drives circuitry, and an
appropriate signal is sent to the interface.
Data is read from the diskette by the data-recovery circuitry,
which consists of a low-level read amplifier, differentiator,
zero-crossing detector, and digitizing circuits. All data decoding
is done by the adapter card.
2 Slimline Diskette Drive
The diskette drive also has the following sensor systems:
• The track 00 switch, which senses when the head/carriage
assembly is at track 00.
• The index sensor, which consists of a light emitting diode
(LED) light source and phototransistor. This sensor is
positioned so that a digital signal is generated when the index
hole is detected.
• The write-protect sensor disables the diskette-drive write
circuits whenever the diskette has a write-protect tab.
For interface information and programming considerations, refer
to "IBM 5-1/4" Diskette Drive Adapter" in this manual.
Slimline Diskette Drive 3
4 Slimline Diskette Drive
Specifications
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
42 mm (1.6 in.)
146 mm (5.8 in.)
203 mm (8.0 in.)
Weight
1.1 kg (2.4 lb)
Power
+12Vdc±5%
+5Vdc±5%
Media
Industry-compatible 5-1/4 inch diskette
Tracks per Inch
48
Number of Tracks
40
Temperature
(exclusive of media)
Operating
Non-operating
10to50°C(41 to122°F)
-40to60°C(-40to140°F)
Relative humidity
(exclusive of media)
Operating
Non-operating
20 to 80% (non-condensing)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Seek Time
6 ms track-to-track
Head Settling Time
21 ms (from last step pulse)
Error Rate
Recoverable
Irrecoverable
Seek Errors
1 per 1 9 bits read
1 per 1 1 2 bits read
1 per 1 6 seeks
Head Life
20,000 hours (normal use)
Media Life
3.0 X 10 6 passes per track
Disk speed
Long Term
Instantaneous
300rpm±1.5%
300rpm±3.0%
Start Time
500 ms (maximum)
Transfer Rate
250K bits/sec
Recording Mode
MFM
Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
Slimline Diskette Drive 5
6 Slimline Diskette Drive
Logic Diagrams
The following pages contain the logic diagrams for the IBM
Slimline Diskette Drive.
Slimline Diskette Drive 7
,stt»
5-B4
-» ±-
J5-A2
»—
vk/ js ff
~" — i
»-B2
» i-
1.
VL/ ^-B3
, T ,
J3^.
TP7
X
-so*-
JM6>-
Slimline Diskette Drive (Sheet 1 of 4)
8 Slimline Diskette Drive
Slimline Diskette Drive (Sheet 2 of 4)
Slimline Diskette Drive 9
-, A7
CR1
IN4150
R14
422K LI
1% 220 M H
-^-rt
10K
-£-"■"*
T w
CR4
IN41S0
H4-
CR5
IN4150
-W-
-{— ■— «-
t^
Slimline Diskette Drive (Sheet 3 of 4)
10 Slimline Diskette Drive
> J1-30
Slimline Diskette Drive (Sheet 4 of 4)
Slimline Diskette Drive 1 1
Notes:
12 Slimline Diskette Drive
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
Double Sided
Diskette Drive
for
IBM Personal Computer AT® and IBM
Personal Computer XT
6139788
March 17, 1986
Notes:
iv March 17, 1986
Contents
Description 1
Interfaces 2
Input Signals 3
Output Signals 5
Specifications 6
Logic Diagrams 7
March 17, 1986
Notes:
vi March 17, 1986
Description
The IBM Personal Computer Double Sided Diskette Drive is a
direct-access device that can store 3 20/ 3 60Kb of data on a
dual-sided 5-1/4 inch diskette. All data format and access
control is in the system. The following figure describes the type
of diskette required by this drive.
Character i st ic
Requi rement
Cert if icat ion
Double sided
48 TPI
kO tracks per surface
Soft Sector
Recording density
5,876 bits per inch
Media coercivity
300 to 350 Oersteds
Jacket
Standard 5"lA inch
Diskette Requirements
The signals for operating the diskette drive are generated through
the IBM Personal Computer AT Fixed Disk and Diskette Drive
Adapter or the IBM Personal Computer Diskette Adapter.
March 17, 1986
Double Sided Diskette Drive 1
Interfaces
The diskette drive has two types of interface: control and dc
power. The following figure shows the signals and pin
assignments for the control interface.
Signal Name
I/O
S ignal P i n
Ground Pin
Reserved
-
2
1
Reserved
-
k
3
-Drive Select 3
i
6
5
- 1 ndex
8
7
-Drive select
10
9
-Drive select 1
12
11
-Drive select 2
]k
13
-Motor On
16
15
-Direction Select
18
17
-Step
20
19
-Write Data
22
21
-Write Gate
2k
23
-Track 00
26
25
-Write Protect
28
27
-Read Data
30
29
-Side 1 Select
1
32
31
Reserved
-
34
33
Control Interface (P1/J1)
Following are the signals and pin assignments for the dc power
interface.
Signal Name
Pin
+ 12 Vdc
+ 12 Vdc Return
+ 5 Vdc Return
+ 5 Vdc
1
2
3
k
Power Interface (P2/J2)
All signals operate between +5 Vdc and ground with the
following definitions:
Inactive Level: +2.5 to +5.25 Vdc
Active Level: 0.0 to +0.4 Vdc
All outputs from the drive can sink 40 mA at the active level,
system provides pull-up registers.
The
2 Double Sided Diskette Drive
March 17, 1986
Input Signals
All input signals are active when low.
Drive Select through 3
These '-drive select' signals enable or disable all other drive
interface signals, except '-motor on 1 . When f -drive select' is at
the active level, the drive is enabled. When it is at the inactive
level, all controlled inputs are ignored, and all drive outputs are
disabled. The enabled or disabled condition of the drive is
established within 500 nanoseconds after a change to the select
input, excluding head-load time and settling times.
-Motor On
An active level of this signal starts the drive motor. There must
be a 750 millisecond delay after '-motor on' becomes active
before any read or write operation starts.
-Direction Select
This signal determines the direction the read/write head moves
when the step signal is pulsed. An active level indicates away
from the center of the diskette (out); an inactive level indicates
toward the center of the diskette (in). Any change in the
'-direction select' signal must be made at least 1 microsecond
before the leading edge of the step pulse, and at least 1
microsecond after the trailing edge of the step pulse.
-Step
This signal causes the read/ write heads to move in the direction
determined by the '-direction select' signal. Motion is started
each time the signal changes from an active to inactive level (at
the trailing edge of the pulse).
March 17, 1986 Double Sided Diskette Drive 3
-Write Data
Each time this signal changes from the inactive to active level, the
current through the read/write heads reverses, and writes a data
bit. This signal is enabled when '-write gate 1 is at the active
level. A 250-nanosecond active pulse of this signal causes a bit to
be written on the diskette. These pulses may occur with either a
4, 6, or 8-microsecond spacing (±0.5%).
-Write Gate
An active level of this input enables the write current circuits, and
the '-write data 1 input controls the writing of information.
Transitions of '-write gate 1 occur 4 to 8 microseconds before the
first significant data bit, and 4 to 8 microseconds after the last
significant data bit. After deactivating '-write gate', deactivation
of '-drive select' and '-motor on', and changing '-side 1 select'
must be delayed 1 millisecond, because the erase head is active
for this period.
-Side 1 Select
This signal determines which side of the two-sided diskette will be
used for reading or writing. An inactive level of this signal selects
the read/ write head on the side of the diskette; an active level
selects the 1 side. A 100-microsecond delay must be allowed
after switching from one head to the other before starting to read
or write.
4 Double Sided Diskette Drive March 17, 1986
Output Signals
-Index
When the drive senses the index hole in the diskette, it generates a
1- to 8 -microsecond active pulse on this line.
-Track 00
An active level of this signal means that the read/ write heads are
at Track 00 (the outermost track).
-Write Protect
An active level of this signal means that a diskette without a
write-protect notch is in the drive. The drive will not write when
a protected diskette is loaded.
-Read Data
A 250-nanosecond active pulse is provided on this line for each
bit detected on the diskette. These pulses may occur with either
4, 6, or 8-microsecond spacing.
Drive-in-Use Indicator
The Drive-in-Use indicator lights when the drive is selected.
March 17, 1986 Double Sided Diskette Drive 5
Specifications
The following figures show the physical, and performance
specifications for this drive.
Power Dissipation
Operating Limits
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
Non-Operating Limits
Ambient Temperature
Humid i ty
Mechanical Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
11 W (Typical)
10 to 50 Degrees C (41 to 114.8 Degress F)
8 to 80%
26.7 Degrees C (84 Degrees F)
-40 to 60 Degrees C (-40 to 140 Degrees F)
No Condensation
146.0 mm (5.8 in.)
41.0 mm (1 .6 in. )
203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
1 .6 kg (3.52 pounds)
Physical Specifications
Capacity Unformatted
500 Kb
Capacity Formatted
3 Sectors Per Track
368.6Kb
8 Sectors Per Track
320.0Kb
Recording density
5,876 bits per inch
Track Density
48 TP 1 (tracks per inc
h)
Cyl inders
40
Tracks
80
Encoding Method
MFM
Rotational Speed
300 RPM ± 1.5%
Transfer Rate
250K bits per second
Latency (Average)
100 ms
Access Time:
Average
81 ms
Track to Track
6 ms
Sett 1 ing Time
15 ms
Head Load Time
ms
Motor Start Time
500 ms
Performance Specifications
6 Double Sided Diskette Drive
March 17, 1986
2
so
o
v©
00
OS
I
¥
o-
I
3-
ft
+6V QC27 Q01/J
1S , is T K jTg,
— — RA VCC GNDa
^B o Vr i rn 0A
o
oro
cro
3
Double Sided Diskette Drive (Sheet 1 of 2)
a
I
SP
SI
O
2
sr
00
as
Double Sided Diskette Drive (Sheet 2 of 2)
Notes:
Notes:
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
High Capacity Diskette
Drive
Contents
Description 1
Interfaces 2
Input Signals 3
Output Signals 5
Drive-in-Use Indicator 5
Specifications 6
Logic Diagrams 7
in
Notes:
IV
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive is
a direct-access device that can store 1.2Mb of data on a
dual-sided 5-1/4 inch diskette. All data format and access
control is in the system. The following figure describes the type
of high-density diskette required by this drive. Diskettes, which
meet these specifications may not be used in either a 160/ 180Kb
or a 320/360Kb diskette drive.
Characteristic
Requirement
Certification
Double Sided
96TPI
80 Tracks/Surface
Soft Sector
Recording Density
9,646 Bits Per Inch
Media Coercivity
600 to 650 Oersteds
Jacket
Standard 5-1/4 Inch
Diskette Requirements
The signals for operating the diskette drive are generated through
the IBM Personal Computer AT Fixed Disk and Diskette Drive
Adapter.
Note: This drive also can read diskettes formatted for a
320/360Kb dual-sided drive or a 160/180Kb single-sided
drive.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive 1
Interfaces
The diskette drive has two types of interface: control and dc
power. The following show the signals and pin assignments for
the control interface.
Signal Name
I/O
Signal Pin
Ground Pin
-Reduced Write
I
2
1
Reserved
-
4
3
-Drive Select 3
I
6
5
-Index
8
7
-Drive Select
I
10
9
-Drive Select 1
I
12
11
-Drive Select 2
I
14
13
-Motor On
I
16
15
-Direction Select
I
18
17
-Step
I
20
19
-Write Data
I
22
21
-Write Gate
I
24
23
-Track 00
26
25
-Write Protect
28
27
-Read Data
30
29
-Side 1 Select
I
32
31
-Diskette Change
34
33
Control Interface (P1/J1)
The signals and pin assignments for the dc power interface are as
follows:
Signal Name
Pin
+ 12 Vdc
+ 12 Vdc Return
+5 Vdc Return
+5 Vdc
1
2
3
4
DC Power Interface (P2/J2)
All signals operate between +5 Vdc and ground with the
following definitions:
Inactive Level: +2.5 to +5.25 Vdc
Active Level: 0.0 to +0.4 Vdc
August 31, 1984
2 Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive
All outputs from the drive can sink 40 mA at the active level. The
system provides pull-up registers.
Input Signals
Following are descriptions of the input signals.
-Reduced Write
The inactive state of this signal indicates that high-density media
is present requiring normal write currents, and the active state
indicates low-density media is present, requiring a reduced write
current.
-Drive Select 0, 1, 2, and 3
The Drive Select signals enable or disable all other drive interface
signals, except ' -motor on ' . When ' -drive select ' is at the active
level, the drive is enabled. When it is at the inactive level, all
controlled inputs are ignored, and all drive outputs are disabled.
The enabled or disabled condition of the drive is established
within 500 nanoseconds after a change to the ' -drive select '
input, excluding head-load time and settling time.
-Motor On
The spindle motor runs when this input is active. The drive
requires a 750 millisecond delay after '-motor on' becomes active
before a read or write operation.
-Direction Select
If this input is at a inactive level the ' -step ' input signal moves
the heads away from the drive spindle. An active level causes the
opposite. This input is stable for a minimum of 1 microsecond
before and after the trailing edge of the step pulse.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive 3
-Step
A 1 -microsecond active pulse on this input causes the read/ write
heads to move one track. The state of ' -Direction Select ' at the
trailing edge of the Step pulse determines the direction of motion.
-Write Data
A 150-nanosecond pulse on this input causes a bit to be written
on the disk if ' -Write Gate ' is active. These pulses may occur
with either a 2, 3, 3.3, 4, 5, or 6. 67 -microsecond spacing ±0.5%.
When Write Gate is inactive, pulses do not appear on this input.
-Write Gate
An active level of this input enables the write current circuits, and
the '-Write Data 1 input controls the writing of information.
Transitions of this line occur 4 to 8 microseconds before the first
significant data bit, and 4 to 8 microseconds after the last
significant data bit. Making this input inactive removes all current
from the read/write heads and allows the read circuits to operate
within 590 microseconds. All motor-start, head-settle, and
head-load times are complied with before the line becomes active.
-Side 1 Select
This signal determines which side of the two-sided diskette will be
used for reading or writing. An inactive level of this signal selects
the read/write head on the side of the diskette; an active level
selects the 1 side. A 100-microsecond delay must be allowed after
switching from one head to the other before starting to read or
write.
August 31, 1984
4 Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive
Output Signals
Following are descriptions of the output signals.
-Index
When a diskette's index hole aligns with the hole in the diskette
jacket, a 1- to 8-millisecond active pulse is generated on this line.
-Track 00
This signal is active when the upper head is on Track 00.
-Write Protect
An active level of this signal means that a diskette without a
write-protect notch is in the drive. The drive will not write when
a protected diskette is loaded.
-Read Data
Each bit detected provides a 150-nanosecond active pulse on this
line. These pulses may occur with either a 2, 3, 3.33, 4, 5, or
6. 67 -microsecond spacing ±0.5%.
-Diskette Change
This output is active unless a diskette is present and a step pulse is
received when the drive is selected.
Drive-in-Use Indicator
The Drive-in-Use indicator lights when the drive is selected.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive 5
Specifications
The following figures show the physical and performance
specifications for this drive.
Power Dissipation
1 1 W (TYP)
Operating Limits
Ambient Temperature 5 to 46 Degrees
Celsius (41 to 114.8 Degrees Fahrenheit)
Relative Humidity 20 to 80 %
Maximum Wet Bulb 29 Degrees Celsius (84
Degrees Fahrenheit)
Non-operating Limits
Ambient Temperature -40 to 60 Degrees
Celsius (-40 to 140 Degrees Fahrenheit)
Humidity no Condensation
Mechanical Dimensions
Width 146.0 mm (5.8 in)
Height 41.0 mm (1.6 in)
Depth 203.2 mm (8 in)
Weight
1.6 kg
Physical Specifications
Capacity Unformatted
1604Kb
Capacity Formatted
1 5 Sectors Per Track
1.2Mb
Recording Density
9646 Bits Per Inch
Track Density
96TPI
Cylinders
80
Tracks
160
Encoding Method
MFM
Rotational Speed
360 RPM
Transfer Rate
500K Bits/Second
Latency (Average)
83 ms
Access Time
Average
91 ms
Track to Track
3 ms
Settling Time
18 ms
Head Load Time
50 ms
Motor Start Time
750 ms
Performance Specifications
August 31, 1984
6 Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive
Logic Diagrams
j i I I J4AI
-O • •
, . i in J_C42 ±R30
,11 „ „ T N 1000(.F:'3.3K
HEADlta . ! ! ^J!?
! MBS /"
^^ T T
i l7 J-C43 iR31
; J4 .B3 «m T ,000 " F !"!■,■
^~ ° ^ — * ,... * — w —
LOW DENSITY O—
r-^J
^T
4.7 M f
,ib* v T7 /^ In
VCC 6N0 " '
1/2W U!*V 2 l
n
M *l2~33Mn
^^S>tete>
21 \
LS00
1
Os
l_
iRNS
1 4.7K
3
0.01 M FX10 C32^C4t
l m 1111111111
'T n 4.7mF 'T>' , p'p^p' , p'T N 'p'p'p<"p
0.01 M F
-He-
High Capacity Diskette Drive (Sheet 1 of 2)
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive 7
+12V +5V RN3
<r~l4_ 7| Xc »• 680 4.7K 9 9 1.2K IK
T^Tt 5E \5 .IK lrr~I^T3l 41 16
l_j b| 452 j^^tr^tpri 4^rpr^
High Capacity Diskette Drive (Sheet 2 of 2)
August 31, 1984
8 Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
Double Sided Diskette
Drive
Contents
Description 1
Interfaces 2
Input Signals 3
Output Signals 5
Drive-in-Use Indicator 5
Specifications 6
Logic Diagrams 7
in
Notes:
IV
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive is
a direct-access device that can store 320/360Kb of data on a
dual-sided 5-1/4 inch diskette. All data format and access
control is in the system. The following figure describes the type
of diskette required by this drive.
Characteristic
Requirement
Certification
Double-Sided
48TPI
40 Tracks/Surface
Soft Sector
Recording Density
5876 Bits Per Inch
Media Coercivity
300 to 350 Oersteds
Jacket
Standard 5-1/4 Inch
Diskette Requirements
The signals for operating the diskette drive are generated through
the IBM Personal Computer AT Fixed Disk and Diskette Drive
Adapter.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive 1
Interfaces
The diskette drive has two types of interface: control and dc
power. The following figure shows the signals and pin
assignments for the control interface.
Signal Name
I/O
Signal Pin
Ground Pin
Reserved
-
2
1
Reserved
-
4
3
-Drive Select 3
I
6
5
-Index
8
7
-Drive Select
I
10
9
-Drive Select 1
I
12
11
-Drive Select 2
I
14
13
-Motor On
I
16
15
-Direction Select
I
18
17
-Step
I
20
19
-Write Data
I
22
21
-Write Gate
I
24
23
-Track 00
26
25
-Write Protect
28
27
-Read Data
30
29
-Side 1 Select
I
32
31
Reserved
-
34
33
Control Interface (P1/J1)
Following are the signals and pin assignments for the dc power
interface.
Signal Name
Pin
+12 Vdc
+12 Vdc Return
+5 Vdc Return
+5 Vdc
1
2
3
4
Power interface (P2/J2)
All signals operate between +5 Vdc and ground with the
following definitions:
Inactive Level: +2.5 to +5.25 Vdc
Active Level: 0.0 to +0.4 Vdc
August 31, 1984
2 Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive
All outputs from the drive can sink 40 mA at the active level. The
system provides pull-up registers.
Input Signals
All input signals are active when low.
Drive Select through 3
These ' -drive select ' signals enable or disable all other drive
interface signals, except ' -motor on ' . When ' -drive select ' is at
the active level, the drive is enabled. When it is at the inactive
level, all controlled inputs are ignored, and all drive outputs are
disabled. The enabled or disabled condition of the drive is
established within 500 nanoseconds after a change to the select
input, excluding head-load time and settling times.
-Motor On
An active level of this signal starts the drive motor. There must
be a 750 millisecond delay after '-motor on 1 becomes active
before any read or write operation starts.
-Direction Select
This signal determines the direction the read/ write head moves
when the step signal is pulsed. An active level indicates away
from the center of the diskette (out); an inactive level indicates
toward the center of the diskette (in). Any change in the
1 -direction select ' signal must be made at least 1 microsecond
before the leading edge of the step pulse, and at least 1
microsecond after the trailing edge of the step pulse.
-Step
This signal causes the read/ write heads to move in the direction
determined by the ' -direction select ' signal. Motion is started
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive 3
each time the signal changes from an active to inactive level (at
the trailing edge of the pulse).
-Write Data
Each time this signal changes from the inactive to active level, the
current through the read/write heads reverses, and writes a data
bit. This signal is enabled when ' -write gate ' is at the active
level. A 250-nanosecond active pulse of this signal causes a bit to
be written on the diskette. These pulses may occur with either a
4, 6, or 8 -microsecond spacing (±0.5%).
-Write Gate
An active level of this input enables the write current circuits, and
the ' -Write Data ' input controls the writing of information.
Transitions of this line occur 4 to 8 microseconds before the first
significant data bit, and 4 to 8 microseconds after the last
significant data bit. After deactivating ' -write gate ' , deactivation
of ' -drive select ' and ' -motor on ' , and changing ' -side 1 select '
must be delayed 1 millisecond, because the erase head is active
for this period.
-Side 1 Select
This signal determines which side of the two-sided diskette will be
used for reading or writing. An inactive level of this signal selects
the read/ write head on the side of the diskette; an active level
selects the 1 side. A 100-microsecond delay must be allowed
after switching from one head to the other before starting to read
or write.
August 31, 1984
4 Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive
Output Signals
-Index
When the drive senses the index hole in the diskette, it generates a
1- to 8 -microsecond active pulse on this line.
-Track 00
An active level of this signal means that the read/write heads are
at Track 00 (the outermost track).
-Write Protect
An active level of this signal means that a diskette without a
write-protect notch is in the drive. The drive will not write when
a protected diskette is loaded.
-Read Data
A 250-nanosecond active pulse is provided on this line for each
bit detected on the diskette. These pulses may occur with either
4, 6, or 8-microsecond spacing.
Drive-in-Use Indicator
The Drive-in-Use indicator lights when the drive is selected.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive 5
Specifications
The following figures show the physical, and performance
specifications for this drive.
Power Dissipation
1 1 W (Typical)
Operating Limits
Ambient Temperature 5 to 46 Degrees C (41
to 114.8 Degrees Fahrenheit)
Relative Humidity 20 to 80 %
Maximum Wet Bulb 29 Degrees Celsius (84
Degrees Fahrenheit)
Non-Operating Limits
Ambient Temperature -40 to 60 Degrees C
(-40 to 140 Degrees Fahrenheit)
Humidity no Condensation
Mechanical Dimensions
Width 146.0 mm (5.8 in)
Height 41 .0 mm (1.6 in)
Depth 203.2 mm (8 in)
Weight
1.6 kg
Physical Specifications
Capacity Unformatted
500Kb
Capacity Formatted:
9 Sectors Per Track
368.6Kb
8 Sectors Per Track
320.0Kb
Recording Density
5876 Bits Per Inch
Track Density
48TPI
Cylinders
40
Tracks
80
Encoding Method
MFM
Rotational Speed
300 RPM
Transfer Rate
250K Bits/Second
Latency (Average)
100 ms
Access Time:
Average
81 ms
Track to Track
5 ms
Settling Time
20 ms
Head Load Time
50 ms
Motor Start Time
750 ms
Performance Specifications
August 31, 1984
6 Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive
c
e
u>
©
n
©
i
c
H
a
©
c
a-
51
£
o
3.
ft
II J4-A6 ^RIO
ERASE Pj I
WRITE I
PROTECT ^
SENSOR I 11 J3B 9
-WRITE GATE <f>—
-WRITE DATA
DIRECTION
T TM'3 r f ^ -|12 ~ ,, "
i J2-1 "
+12V <^-! rrvv V4
7 05Z
+12V RET <J>—
+5V RET 6-^
T-L ,„ e .X. -X- X. -X. X.
x '" R22 4.7K
— H^v r 0- ! frame Ti.
o
(JQ
3
Double Sided Diskette Drive (Sheet 1 of 2)
i
©
s
c
>
H
O
o
c
■g
ST
SP
SI
a
C
-Kh-K}
/ T v 0.056ai _
A? 14
n i3i 3i
CI
„t ' ^ 0.047m
mm r,
00
Double Sided Diskette Drive (Sheet 2 of 2)
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer
3.5"-720KB Diskette Drive
6183315
March 17, 1986
Notes:
Contents
Description 1
3.5" Diskette 1
Operation 2
Interface 3
Input Signals 4
Output Signals 6
Drive-in-Use Indicator 6
Specifications 7
Logic Diagrams 8
March 17, 1986
Notes:
vi March 17, 1986
Description
The IBM Personal Computer 3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive is a
direct-access device containing a spindle drive system, a head
positioning system, and a read/write/erase system. The drive
uses double-sided diskettes with 80 tracks on each side. Each
diskette has a formatted capacity of 720K.
3.5" Diskette
This diskette is a flexible magnetic disk with a metal hub enclosed
in a protective hard plastic cover. The disk is free to rotate within
the cover and is continuously cleaned by the cover's soft fabric
lining. The diskette's write-protect feature is enabled by sliding
the plastic window in the corner of the diskette cover to the open
position. A sliding metal cover is provided to protect the diskette
when it is out of the drive. The following figure is a simplified
drawing of the diskette used with the 3.5"-720KB Diskette Drive.
Top View
Bottom View
Sliding Cover
□
Write Protect
Window
March 17, 1986
3.5 ' -720KB Diskette Drive 1
Operation
When a diskette is being inserted, metal guides ensure it is in the
correct position. The diskette then drops down onto the spindle
motor. The spindle motor engages the metal hub of the diskette
through a pin-to-hole arrangement called the chucking
mechanism. The chucking mechanism provides precise
positioning of the diskette. The upper read/ write head is then
lowered onto the diskette. (The lower head is fixed and does not
move vertically.) The spindle system spins the diskette at a
constant speed of 300 revolutions per minute (rpm). A sensor
generates an index signal once per rotation of the spindle motor.
The two read/ write heads are positioned over the desired track of
the diskette by a stepper motor. One step of the stepper motor
results in a one-track linear movement of the read/ write heads.
An optical sensor generates a signal when the heads are over
track 00.
During a write operation, data is provided to the drive in modified
frequency modulation (MFM) coded form by a diskette drive
adapter.
Note: Refer to the "Sy stem-to- Adapter Compatibility
Chart" and " Option-to- Adapter Compatibility Chart" in
the front of the Technical Reference Options and Adapters
manual for systems and types of diskette drive adapters
compatible with this drive.
The read/write heads record a track of 0.115 mm (0.0045 in.)
nominal width, within a 0.1875 mm (0.00738 in.) track pitch.
The area between the tracks is erased by an erase head. If the
diskette is write-protected, the drive's write-protect sensor
inhibits the write operation.
During a read operation, the signal from the head is amplified and
filtered by read-recovery circuitry, which consists of a low-level
read amplifier, differentiator, zero-crossing detector, and
digitizing circuits. The data is then transferred as MFM data to
the diskette drive adapter.
To remove a diskette, push the diskette eject button to the rear.
This raises the upper head from the diskette, lifts the diskette off
the spindle motor, and ejects the diskette approximately 1 1 mm
3.5"-720KB Diskette Drive March 17, 1986
(7/16 in.). A signal is sent from the drive to the diskette adapter
indicating that the diskette has been ejected. The signal is reset
when a diskette is inserted and the diskette drive adapter selects
and steps the drive.
Interface
The diskette drive connects to a diskette drive adapter through an
internal, daisy-chained, flat cable (data/control cable). An
interface adapter is used to connect the drive's 40-pin edge
connector to the 34-pin data/control cable and the 4-pin power
connector. The following figure shows the signals and pin
assignments for the drive's 40-pin edge connector.
Note: Assignments for pins 1 through 34 are the same on both
sides of the interface adapter. Pins 37 through 40 go to the 4-pin
power connector.
Signal Name
I/O
S ignal P in
Ground Pin
Reserved
-
2
1
Reserved
-
4
3
-Drive Select 3
6
5
- 1 ndex
8
7
-Drive Select
10
9
-Drive Select 1
12
11
-Drive Select 2
14
13
-Motor On
16
15
-Direction Select
18
17
-Step
20
19
-Write Data
22
21
-Write Gate
24
23
-Track 00
26
25
-Write Protect
28
27
-Read Data
30
29
-Side 1 Select
32
31
-Diskette Change
34
33
Reserved
-
36
35
+ 5 Vdc
-
38
37
+12 Vdc
-
40
39
3.5"- Diskette Interface
March 17, 1986
3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive
A key slot is located between pins 34 and 36. Pins 35 and 36 are
grounded on the drive.
J1
IS
J2
34 ^ 2
Interface $
Adapter
Jill I II II III II I llll U
m
Jl U U l^
r 1
rfW
/ 36 34
40
jmimiiiimiiiHi
36 34
Diskette Drive
\
Diskette Drive Interface Adapter
Input Signals
All input signals are active when low.
-Drive Select through 3
These '-drive select 1 signals enable or disable all other drive
interface signals, except '-motor on 1 . When '-drive select' is
active, the drive is enabled. When it is inactive, all controlled
inputs are ignored, and all drive outputs are disabled. If, at this
time, the '-motor on' signal is also inactive, the drive is in low
power standby mode. When the drive is not in standby mode, the
maximum '-drive select' delay time is 500 nanoseconds. When
the drive is in standby mode, all signals except '-track 00' and
'-write protect' have a maximum delay of 500 nanoseconds.
-Motor On
An active level of this signal starts the spindle motor. There must
be a 750-millisecond delay after '-motor on' becomes active
before a read or write operation starts. When inactive, this signal
causes the spindle motor to decelerate and stop.
3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive
March 17, 1986
-Direction Select
When this signal is inactive, the '-step' signal moves the heads
away from the drive spindle; when active, toward the drive
spindle. Any change in the f -direction select" signal must be
made at least 1 microsecond before the leading edge of the
'-step 1 pulse, and at least 1 microsecond after the trailing edge of
the f -step f pulse.
-Step
A 1 -microsecond active pulse of this signal causes the read/ write
heads to move one track. The state of '-direction select 1 at the
trailing edge of the '-step 1 pulse determines the direction of
motion.
-Write Data
A 250-nanosecond pulse of this signal causes a bit to be written if
'-write gate' is active. These pulses may occur with either a 2, 3,
3.3, 4, 5, or 6.67-microsecond spacing ±0.5%. When '-write
gate' is inactive, pulses do not appear on this input.
-Write Gate
When active, this signal enables the write current circuits, and the
'-write data' signal controls the writing of information.
Transitions of this line occur 4 to 8 microseconds before the first
significant data bit, and 4 to 8 microseconds after the last
significant data bit. Making this signal inactive removes all
current from the read/write heads and allows the read circuits to
operate within 590 microseconds. All motor-start, head-settle,
and head-load times are met before the line becomes active.
-Side 1 Select
Making this signal active selects the upper head; otherwise the
lower head is selected.
March 17, 1986 3.5 M - 720KB Diskette Drive
Output Signals
-Index
When the drive senses an f -Index f , it generates a 1- to
8-microsecond active pulse on this line.
-Track 00
When active, this signal indicates that the read/ write heads are at
Track (the outermost track).
-Write Protect
When active, this signal indicates that a diskette with an open
write-protect window (write-protected diskette) is in the drive,
and the drive will not write.
-Read Data
A 250-nanosecond active pulse is provided on this line for each
bit detected on the diskette. These pulses may occur with either
4, 6, or 8-microsecond spacing.
-Diskette Change
This signal is active unless a diskette is present and a step pulse is
received by the diskette adapter when the drive is selected. The
presence of a diskette is determined by a media sensor.
Drive-In-Use Indicator
The Drive-In-Use indicator lights when the drive is selected.
3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive March 17, 1986
Specifications
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
42 mm ( 1 .63 in. )
102 mm (4.0 in. )
156 mm (6.1 in. )
Weight
0.86 kg (1.9 lb.)
Power
+12 Vdc ± 10%
+5 Vdc ± 10%
Media
Capacity Unformatted
Capacity Formatted
3.5" ANSI X3B8/83-14 compatible
1 .0M bytes
500 K bytes per side
6.25 K bytes per track
720K bytes
Track Density
135 tracks per inch
Tracks
80
Number of Heads
2
Transfer Rate
250K bits per second (MFM)
Access Time
Track-to-Track
Head Settle Time
Head Load Time
Motor Start Time
6 ms
15 ms
ms
750 ms (maximum)
Temperature
(exclusive of media)
Operat ing
Non-operat ing
0.6 to 51.7°C (33 to 125°F)
-40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)
Relative Humidity
(exclusive of media)
Operat ing
Non-operat ing
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Disk Speed
Long Term
1 nstantaneous
300 rpm ± 1.5%
300 rpm ± 1.5%
Error Rate
Recoverable
1 rrecoverable
Seek Errors
1 per 109 bits read
1 per 1012 bits read
1 per 106 seeks
Head Life
Approximately 360,000,000 wear
revolutions with less than
10% signal loss
Media Life
4.0 X 1016 passes per track
Specifications
March 17, 1986
3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive
00
In
r
©
O
3.
+ 12V
RETURN
+5V
RETURN
FRAME GND
FRAME GND
«.C5
Z^ZC4 72Z33/1
0.1m
R2
3.3K
Q1
A881
L3
100/i
/■YYYX_- = _A.
: : \ / [A4]
IZC3 Z233/x
0.1m
„ 1
R3
100K
36
> <
HH
C6
0.01m
35 (
f
V©
00
[AH
(SH. 2) / ^-
2 62504P L15
1C4
C100
>
ii
+ C8
Z2Z2.2M
5.0WV
AG
L_T"
(SH. 2) / A-
1 62504P _16
+ 12V
Note 1 : Unless Otherwise Specified
R; 1/4W5%
C; 50WV
(Same On Following Pages)
Thef
3.5"-
+ 12VA
(tolC1)
Note 2: Test Pin Assignment
to o
MARKING
SIGNAL NAME
+AD
ANALOG DATA +
-AD
ANALOG DATA -
c« CD
AG
ANALOG GROUND
RD
READ OUT DIGITAL DATA
DG
DIGITAL GROUND
ZS
TRACK ZERO
*r Z
WP
WRITE PROTECT
CD O
+5V
Dl
DISK IN
sc
IP
INDEX PULSE
o o
ME
MOTOR ENABLE
diagrams
Drive.
PO
RW PWR ON
Note 3: All Odd-numbered Pins in PJ1
are Grounded (except 35 Pin) | A3 |
+5VSB
(to IC5)
o
cr
CD
td
CD
►1
CO
O
O
o
3
r
o
&5
(JQ
SB
3
3.5" - 720KB Diskette Drive (Sheet 1 of 5)
3
00
In
r
o
WRITE ENABLE
PJ6 PJ10
5| 62504P Lli
j .Riel j jfrgwv p-|
VO
3.5" - 720KB Diskette Drive (Sheet 2 of 5)
In
^1
o
ft
D
3.
f
so
00
(SH. 2) LOWWC1 /-
(SH. 2) WDATAO A
(SH. 2) WGATEO /-
(SH. 2) EGATEO /-
(SH. 2)SIDE01 /-
-/ RDDAT1 (SH. 2)
3.5" - 720KB Diskette Drive (Sheet 3 of 5)
2
o
00
In
r
O
is
(SH. 2) +12V y
(SH. 2) MTRENO ^>
(SH. 2) GND y~
(SH. 2) +5V ^
(SH. 2) WPRCTO ^>"
(?H. 2) WPSWHO ^
(SH. 2) IXPLS1 y~
SPINDLE MOTOR
3.5" - 720KB Diskette Drive (Sheet 4 of 5)
to
in
r
o
i
v©
00
.OS
(SH. 2) WPSWHO y
(SH. 2) WPRCTO y-
(SH.2)+12V^-
(SH. 2)GND ^>
-T~~
3.5" - 720KB Diskette Drive (Sheet 5 of 5)
Adapter Card
The following is a logic diagram for the Adapter Card.
(CABLE SIDE)
34 PIN CONNECTOR P
(3.5" FDD SIDE)
40 PIN CONNECTOR J 1
J Reserved
1
J Reserved
1
D/Select 3
I
1 |ndex
3
oV
°<J
4^ 16
D/Select
U3,
2
6 r^o 14
D/Select 1
U3
3
D/Select 2
U3
4
2 rSo 18
Motor On
U3
5
■.U2
4 ^16
] Dir/Select
U3, 6
I/*
6 rSo 14
Step
U3
n
8 ^ 2 12
Write Data
U3
10
11 r^ 9
Write Gate
+5VO w\,
U3
9
v>°
Track 00
5 Q^l 15
W/Protect
7
, Read Data
9 _ U /111
~\J
i7 rN 3
Head Select
U3
8
5
o^l 15
lx°
Disk Change
"power CONNECTOR J2
°\l
35
36
38
| — No Connectio
| — No Connectio
o U1 (pin 20), U2 (pin 20), U3 (pin
14)
37
" n
39
1 ,T„w° U . m
! ! !^w"° turn \
40
\ ' 1 ^ vn ^ ,urn
i i - /
\—
Notes:
U1,U2 = 74LS244
U3 = 220//330
OhmsT-RES
Adapter Card Logic Diagram
March 17, 1986
3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive 13
Notes:
14 3.5 "-720KB Diskette Drive March 17, 1986
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM 10MB Fixed Disk
Drive
6361482
Contents
Description 1
Specifications 3
Logic Diagrams 5
iii
IV
Description
The IBM 10MB Fixed Disk Drive is a random-access storage
device that uses two non-removable 5-1/4 inch disks for storage.
Each disk surface employs one movable head to service 306
cylinders. The total formatted capacity of the four heads and
surfaces is 10M bytes (17 sectors per track with 512 bytes per
sector and a total of 1224 tracks).
An impact-resistant enclosure provides mechanical and
contamination protection for the heads, actuator, and disks. A
self-contained air recirculating system, which consists of an
internal filter and a breather filter, maintains a clean-air
environment. Thermal isolation of the stepper and spindle motor
assemblies from the disk enclosure results in a very low
temperature rise within the enclosure. This isolation provides a
greater off -track margin and the ability to perform read and write
operations immediately after power-up with no thermal
stabilization delay.
, Scrubbing
Filter
Fixed Disk Drive 1
2 Fixed Disk Drive
Specifications
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
82.55 mm (3.25 in.)
146.05 mm (5.75 in.)
203 mm (8.0 in.)
Weight
2.08 kg (4.6 lb)
Power
+1 2 Vdc ± 5%, 1 .8 A (4.5 A maximum)
+5 Vdc ±5%, 0.7 A (1 .0 A maximum)
Maximum Ripple
1 % with equivalent resistive load
Media
Rigid media disk
Track Density
345 tracks per inch
Number of Tracks
1224
Temperature
Operating
Non-operating
4to50°C(40to 122°F)
-40to60°C(-40to140°F)
Relative humidity
Operating
Maximum Wet Bulb
8 to 80% (non-condensing)
26°C (78°F)
Shock
Operating
Non-operating
10 Gs
20 Gs
Access Time
3 ms track-to-track
Average Latency
8.33 ms
Error Rates
Recoverable
Irrecoverable
Seek Errors
1 per 10 10 bits read
1 per 10 12 bits read
1 per 10 6 seeks
Design Life
5-years (8,000 hours MTF)
Disk speed
3600 rpm ± 1 %
Transfer Rate
5.0M bps
Recording Mode
MFM
Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
Fixed Disk Drive 3
4 Fixed Disk Drive
9
o-
O
o
3.
in
ZMHZ Q
1.R71 1C23
'10KT.047
1 ®r
^s
' .tea !„
¥3
UW^
~?2~
R81£
IK 1
CL
_r
^
j® — 5 15 l
-Jfio
10 4Q
74LS173
T
h
-WRITE FAULT >-
C29+T |C3
4.7 i i 47-53 +£?) (^
10% I I' V4.?
,4:035-37 u "
TP7-10
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS. 1/4W. 5%.
2. ALL 1% RESISTORS ARE 1/8W.
3. CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS, +80-20%.
4. DIODES ARE IN4148.
5. -*- INDICATES CONNECTOR J1
6. -*7- INDICATES CONNECTOR J2 THRU J8.
7. ® INDICATES TEST POINT PINS.
V T7 2.4.6.8,1 2.
— X 1
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
a r"* — +12V
i-V— N 6 J ' - 5K R83.470 q ,]?~ >
r - iat>n
-3j^>SimT72W^
r
O
cro
ore
3
a
»■
I
-D SELECT
R68i
150 |
L^— +ACTIVITY LED
'^—-ACTIVITY LED
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 1 (Sheet 2 of 3)
a
NOTES (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED):
1. ALL RESISTORS ARE IN OHMS 1/4W. 5%.
2. ALL CAPACITORS ARE IN MICROFARADS, 10%
3.— *- INDICATES J1.
4. 51 INDICATES JZ.
[1QG5. POLYCARBONATE 50V. 10%.
*3
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
00
a
O
%
o
a-
♦ +5V
. R16
•1470
(^
TIMER OUT 3
^ UI4
L_5^»S-Jl 1
i
X
n
4 i 5 I|pr
ZL
" 7908C 3.1/zwr— w
rai + r~T T T — out |N — T — T — ~^T CRI IN5817
"I C8lci4l I BNP 1 |C13J_C3
-4--8V X
iCR14
IN 4001
TCR5
_[_ 1N5817
P2-2.4.6.8.11,12.15.16.19.20>
^^ SHEET NO.
2. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 5% VALUE IN OHMS
CAPACITORS +80-20% VALUE IN rf
3. El IS A PROGRAMMABLE JUMPER SOCKET
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 2 (Sheet 1 of 3)
9
o-
O
I
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 2 (Sheet 2 of 3)
9
a-
*
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 2 (Sheet 3 of 3)
9
ft
a.
ft
(3) -POWER LOSS -
(2) -OPTIONAL RESET -
|2) +SEEK COMFIETE -
J1-6 -WRITE S»n >
(2) HD SEL P -
12) HO SEL 2' -
12) HD SELF -
<R9S <B100 Jr f" 1 *
>4.7K ^'>f j+ia
n»3 U3
-X-»<r>«.
HS>
S»-»-Wv— |
5» +5* +5»
Is i's^i,
I I K < NMI
MOTOR FEEORACK
-> J32-5
->J32-I1
-> J32-13
-» 0* RET J32-1
■» OC RET J32-9
■* OR RET J3Z-2
-> OD RET J32-10
— » +REOUCE RESISTANCE |
— ZERO SEISE |2)
SET SEEK COMPUTE |i
— +W» DISARLE (3)
— REDUCE WR CURRENT (3)
— > OA. OC J32-7
— » 01. 00 J32-R
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 3 (Sheet 1 of 3)
2.
<
J2-5 —CONTROLLER RESET
ID -SET SEEK COMPLETE
> -CHIP EH J31-2
SEL 2' |1|
-> +HEADSEIA/0 J3I-IZ.20
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 3 (Sheet 2 of 3)
Ill +IEOIM KSISTIIIICI
a
D
IF
©
(1) +REDUGE WB CUMENT
»EE(+.7) Jll-11
Hct|+1U1) J31-S.17
FUSE HI (+SI) J3I-3
-MNCMIEIT J3I-7.15
■I SELECT J3l-t.ll
Fixed Disk Drive — Type 3 (Sheet 3 of 3)
Notes:
14 Fixed Disk Drive
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer
20MB Fixed Disk Drive
1521498
March 17, 1985
Notes:
Contents
Description 1
Interfaces 2
Control Input Signals 3
Output Control Signals 5
Data-Transfer Signals 7
Specifications - Type 13 9
Specifications - Type 2 10
Logic Diagrams - Type 13 11
March 17, 1986
Notes:
vi March 17, 1986
Description
The IBM Personal Computer 20MB Fixed Disk Drive is a
direct-access device that can store up to 20M (1M = 1,048,576
bytes) of formatted data. The average access time is 85
milliseconds using a servo positioner.
An impact-resistant enclosure provides mechanical and
contamination protection for the heads, actuators, and disks. A
self-contained air recirculating system, which consists of an
internal filter and a breather filter, maintains a clean-air
environment. Thermal isolation of the stepper and spindle motor
assemblies from the disk enclosure results in a very low
temperature rise within the enclosure. This isolation provides a
greater off-track margin and the ability to perform read and write
operations immediately after power-up with no thermal
stabilization delay.
Disk
March 17, 1986
20MB Fixed Disk Drive 1
Interfaces
The interfaces of this drive are divided into three categories:
control, data transfer, and dc power.
The control interface is a 34-pin printed circuit board (PCB) edge
connector. The signals and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name
S igna 1 Pin
Ground Pin
Reserved
2
1
-Head select 2
h
3
-Write gate
6
5
-Seek complete
8
7
-Track 000
10
9
-Write fault
12
11
-Head select
14
13
Reserved
16
15
-Head select 1
18
17
- 1 ndex
20
19
-Ready
22
21
-Step
2k
23
-Drive select 1
26
25
-Drive select 2
28
27
-Drive select 3
30
29
-Drive select k
32
31
-Direction in
34
33
Control Interface
2 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
March 17, 1986
The data transfer interface is a 20-pin PCB connector. The
signals and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name
S i gnal P i n
-Drive Selected
1
+MFM Write Data
13
-MFM Write Data
14
+MFM Read Data
17
-MFM Read Data
18
Grounds
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11,
12, 15, 16, 19, 20
Reserved
3, 5, 7, 9
Data-Transfer Interface
The dc power interface is a 4-pin PCB connector. The signals
and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name
Pin
+12 Vdc
1
+12 Vdc Return
2
+5 Vdc Return
3
+5 Vdc
k
DC Power Interface
Control Input Signals
The control input signals are of two types: those that are
multiplexed in a multiple drive system, and those intended to do
the multiplexing. These input signals have the following
specifications.
• Active=Low=True: 0.0 to 0.4 Vdc at 40 mA
• Inactive=High=False: 2.5 to 5.25 Vdc at mA
The following are descriptions of the control input signals.
March 17, 1986
20MB Fixed Disk Drive 3
-Write Gate
The active level of this signal allows data to be written on the disk
and prohibits any step pulses from moving the heads. The
inactive level allows data to be read from the disk, and allows the
step pulse to move the heads.
-Head Select 0, 1, and 2
These three signals enable the selection of each read/ write head
in a binary-coded sequence. The '-head select f signal is the
least significant. Heads are numbered through 8. When all
head-select signals are inactive, head is selected.
-Direction In
This signal defines the direction the read/write heads move when
'-step* is pulsed. An inactive level defines the direction as out,
and if a pulse is applied to '-step 1 , the read/ write heads move
away from the center of the disk. An active level defines the
direction as in, and the read/ write heads move toward the center
of the disk.
-Step
This signal causes the read/write heads to move in the direction
defined by the '-direction in f signal. The motion starts when the
T -step f signal changes from active to inactive (the trailing edge of
this signal pulse). Any change in '-direction in ! is made at least
100 nanoseconds before the leading edge of the step pulse. This
drive supports two methods of stepping or seeking:
Slow Seek The read/ write heads move at the rate of
incoming step pulses. The minimum time
between successive steps is 3 milliseconds and the
minimum pulse width is 2 microseconds.
Buffered Seek The adapter's controller may burst step pulses to
the drive until the time after the last pulse
exceeds 200 microseconds or the maximum
4 20MB Fixed Disk Drive March 17, 1986
number of step pulses is received (1 for each
track). The drive starts motion of the heads after
receiving the first step pulse. Step pulses are sent
to the drive every 70 to 200 microseconds.
-Drive Select Signals 1, 2, 3, and 4
When one of these signals is active, it connects that drive to the
control lines. The drive select lines are daisy-chained and all
drives are jumpered to respond to drive 1 .
The fixed disk drive provides a 220/230 ohm termination for a
single '-drive select' signal.
Output Control Signals
The drive control signals are open collector outputs that can sink
a maximum of 40 mA in the active state, with a maximum output
voltage of 0.4 Vdc. When the output is in the inactive state, the
collector's cutoff current is a maximum of 250 microamperes.
-Seek Complete
This signal goes active when the read/ write heads settle on the
final track at the end of a seek. Reading or writing is not
attempted when '-seek complete 1 is inactive. The following
situations force '-seek complete 1 inactive:
• When power-on starts a recalibration sequence because the
read/write heads are not over track
• When less than 2 microseconds have elapsed after the leading
edge of a step pulse or a series of step pulses
• If the +5 or +12 Vdc fluctuates or is lost momentarily but
restored.
The f -seek complete 1 signal returns to the active level no later
than 100 milliseconds after the trailing edge of the last step pulse.
March 1 7, 1 986 20MB Fixed Disk Drive 5
-Track 000
This signal is at an active level when the drive's read/ write heads
are at the outermost track.
-Write Fault
This signal means that a condition at the drive is causing improper
operation of the disk. An active level of this signal prevents
further writing and stepping at the drive until drive power is
switched off.
This signal goes active when any of the following conditions
occur:
• Write current exists in the head without '-write gate 1 active,
or no write current exists in the head with '-write gate ! active
and f -drive select 1 active.
• A step pulse is received while '-write gate 1 is active.
• Multiple heads are selected when '-write gate' is active.
• DC voltages are out of tolerance.
• An off track condition is detected while '-write gate' is
active.
• The '-write gate' signal is active when write is disabled by the
drive electronics.
-Index
The drive provides this output signal once each revolution to
indicate the beginning of a track. This signal normally is inactive
and goes active to indicate an index. Only the change from
inactive to active is valid (leading edge of the pulse).
6 20MB Fixed Disk Drive March 17, 1986
-Ready
When this signal and '-seek complete 1 are active, the drive is
ready to read, write, or seek, and the I/O signals are valid. An
inactive level of this signal prevents all writing and seeking.
The '-ready 1 signal is inactive four times during drive operation:
• At power-up time, '-ready 1 remains inactive until:
- Access recalibration to track is complete.
- Spindle speed is stable within ± 1.0% of nominal (10
revolution average).
• Spindle speed deviates ±1.0% of nominal (10 revolution
average).
• The '-write fault' signal is active.
Data-Transfer Signals
All signals associated with the transfer of data between the drive
and the system are differential (pairs of balanced signals) and are
not multiplexed.
Two pairs of balanced signals are used for the transfer of data:
'write data' and 'read data'. The following describes the
data-transfer signals.
MFM Write Data
This is a differential pair that defines signal shifts written on the
track. When ' +MFM write data' goes more positive than
'-MFM write data', flux reverses on the track, provided that
'-write gate' is active. The system drives f -MFM write data' to
an active level when in the read mode.
March 17,1 986 20MB Fixed Disk Drive 7
MFM Read Data
Read data is sent to the system through the differential pair of
f MFM read data' lines. When f +MFM read data 1 goes more
positive than '-MFM read data', flux reverses on the track of the
selected head.
8 20MB Fixed Disk Drive March 17, 1986
Specifications - Type 13
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
82.5 mm (3-25 in.)
146 mm (5.75 in.)
203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
Weight
2.8 kg (6.16 lb.)
Power
+12 Vdc ± 5%, 1.0 A (2.0 A maximum)
+5 Vdc ± 5%, 0.75 A (0.8 A maximum)
Maximum Ripple (0 to 15 MHz)
100 mV, peak-to-peak
Media
Rigid media disk
Track Density
350 tracks per inch
Number of Tracks
2448
Formatted Capacity
Bytes/Sector
Sectors/Track
Number of Cyl inders
Number of Heads
21.3 M bytes
512
17
306
8
Temperature
Operat ing
Non-Operat ing
10 to 45°C (50 to 113°F)
-40 to 65°C (-40 to 140°F)
Relative Humidity
Operat i ng
Non-Operat ing
Maximum Wet Bulb
8 to 80% (non-condensing)
5 to 80% (non-condensing)
26°C (78.8°F) (non-condensing)
Shock
Operat ing
Non-Operat ing
10 Gs
25 Gs
Access Time
Track-to-Track
Average
Max imum
20 ms (average)
85 ms (traverse 1/3 Tracks)
200 ms
Average Latency
8.33 ms
Error Rates
Recoverable
( 16 retr ies-sof t )
Non-recoverable
Seek Errors
1 per 10 10 bits read
1 per 10 12 bits read
1 per 5 X 10 6 seeks
Design Life
Disk Speed
Transfer Rate
Recording Mode
5 years (20,000 hours MTBF)
3600 rpm ± 0.5%
5.0M bps
MFM
Specifications - Type 13
March 17, 1986
20MB Fixed Disk Drive 9
Specifications - Type 2
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
82.5 mm (3.25 in.)
146 mm (5.75 in.)
203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
Weight
0.59 kg (1.3 lb.)
Power
+12 Vdc ± 5%, 1.0 A (2.0 A maximum)
+5 Vdc ± 5%, 0.75 A (0.8 A maximum)
Maximum Ripple (0 to 15 MHz)
100 mV, peak-to-peak
Media
Rigid media di sk
Track Density
580 tracks per inch
Number of Tracks
2460
Formatted Capacity
Bytes/Sector
Sectors/Track
Number of Cylinders
Number of Heads
20. 1 M bytes
512
17
615
4
Temperature
Operating
Non-Operating
10 to 45°C (50 to 113°F)
-40 to 65°C (-40 to 140°F)
Relative Humidity
Operat ing
Non-Operat ing
Maximum Wet Bulb
8 to 80% (non-condensing)
5 to 80% (non-condensing)
26°C (75-8°F) (non-condensing)
Shock
Operating
Non-Operat ing
10 Gs
25 Gs
Access Time
Track-to-Track
Average
Maximum
20 ms (average)
85 ms (traverse 1/3 Tracks)
200 ms
Average Latency
8.33 ms
Error Rates
Recoverable
( 16 retr ies-sof t)
Non-recoverable
Seek Errors
1 per 10J0 bits read
1 per 10 12 bits read
1 per 5 X 10 6 seeks
Design Life
Disk Speed
Transfer Rate
Recording Mode
5 years (20,000 hours MTBF)
3600 rpm ± 0.5%
5.0M bps
MFM
Specifications - Type 2
1 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
March 17, 1986
00
o
a
ft
1 M F + 5V
40 0.1 ^F |20 |6
RESE T WRITE FAULT
[-22mF 1SS176
r^. z8
M^
^M74LS04P
(DRIVE SELECT)
S J2 CONNECTOR 2. 4
^
O MOTOR START (SH. 3)
— O PHASE A (SH. 3)
— O PHASE B (SH.3)
O PHASE B (SH.3)
S. DRV SELECTED
~~7 LED-CATHODE
O REDUCE IWC (SH.2)
4 | -v J1/10
5 |Z20QD^ ^ TRACK
_ "tj Z20 Qp^ ^ SEEK COMPLETE
1o] Z9 Q>^ ^ DRIVE SELECTED
__9, . J1/20
" ^Z20 A>2 ^ INDEX
WRITE FAULT
O DRV SELECTED (SH.2)
O WRITE SELECT (SH.2)
— ^ DRIVE CONNECTED
->
DRIVE CONNECTED
r
o
3
H
I— '
(SH.3) POWER ERROR O-
20MB Fixed Disk Drive - Type 1 3 (Sheet 1 of 4)
fcs>
O
s
w
?
a
o
CD
ANALOG PRE AMP (SH. 3)
00
OS
20MB Fixed Disk Drive - Type 13 (Sheet 2 of 4)
2
85
00
o
a.
O
«3
2 ANALOG PRE AMP (SH. 2)
2 ANALOG 592 (SH.2)
20MB Fixed Disk Drive - Type 13 (Sheet 3 of 4)
O
99
SO
00
as
(SH. 3) MOTOR START O
^ (BLACK)
O MOTOR STOP A (SH. 3)
MOTOR STOP B (SH. 3)
20MB Fixed Disk Drive - Type 13 (Sheet 4 of 4)
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
20MB Fixed Disk Drive
Contents
Description 1
Interfaces 1
Control Input Signals 2
Output Control Signals 4
Data-Transfer Signals 6
Overlapped Seek 7
Specifications 8
Logic Diagrams 9
m
Notes:
IV
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive is a
direct-access device that can store up to 20Mb of formatted data.
The average access time is 40 milliseconds using a quasi
closed-loop servo positioner.
Interfaces
The interfaces of this drive are divided into three categories:
control, data transfer, and dc power.
The control interface is a 34 pin printed circuit board (PCB) edge
connector. The following shows the signals and pin assignments.
Signal Name
Signal Pin
Ground Pin
-Head Select 3
2
1
-Head Select 2
4
3
-Write Gate
6
5
-Seek Complete
8
7
-Track 000
10
9
-Write Fault
12
11
-Head Select
14
13
Reserved
16
15
-Head Select 1
18
17
-Index
20
19
-Ready
22
21
-Step
24
23
-Drive Select 1
26
25
-Drive Select 2
28
27
-Drive Select 3
30
29
-Drive Select 4
32
31
-Direction In
34
33
Control Interface
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive 1
The data transfer interface is a 20 Pin PCB connector,
signals and pin assignments are as follows:
The
Signal Name
Signal Pin
-Drive Selected
1
+MFM Write Data
13
-MFM Write Data
14
+MFM Read Data
17
-MFM Read Data
18
Ground
2,4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16, 19
Data-Transfer Interface
The dc power interface is a 4-pin PCB connector. The signals and
pin assignments follow.
Signal Name
Pin
+ 12 Vdc
+ 12 Vdc Return
+5 Vdc
+5 Vdc Return
1
2
4
3
DC Power Interface
Control Input Signals
The control input signals are of two types: those that are
multiplexed in a multiple drive system, and those intended to do
the multiplexing. These input signals have the following
specifications.
Active: 0.0 to 0.4 Vdc at 40 mA
Inactive: 2.5 to 5.25 Vdc at mA
The following are descriptions of the control input signals.
-Write Gate
The active level of this signal allows data to be written on the
disk. The inactive level allows data to be read from the disk, and
allows the step pulse to move the heads.
2 Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
August 31, 1984
-Head Select 0, 1, 2, and 3
These four signals enable the selection of each read/write head in
a binary-coded sequence. ' -Head Select ' is the least
significant. Heads are numbered through 15. When all Head
Select signals are inactive, head is selected.
-Direction In
This signal defines the direction the read/write heads move when
'-Step' is pulsed. An inactive level defines the direction as out,
and if a pulse is applied to ' -Step 1 , the read/write heads move
away from the center of the disk. An active level defines the
direction as in, and the read/write heads move toward the center
of the disk.
-Step
This signal causes the read/write heads to move in the direction
defined by the ' -Direction In ' signal. The motion starts when the
1 -Step ' signal changes from active to inactive (the trailing edge
of this signal pulse). Any change in ' -Direction In ' is made at
least 100 nanoseconds before the leading edge of the step pulse.
This drive supports two methods of stepping or seeking:
Slow Seek The read/write heads move at the rate of
incoming step pulses. The minimum time
between successive steps is 3 milliseconds and
the minimum pulse width is 2 microseconds.
Buffered Seek The adapter's controller may burst step pulses to
the drive until the time after the last pulse
exceeds 200 microseconds or the maximum
number of step pulses is received (1 for each
track). The drive starts motion of the heads
after receiving the first step pulse. Step pulses
are sent to the drive every 35 microseconds.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive 3
-Drive Select Signals 1 through 4
When one of these signals is active, it connects that drive to the
control lines. Making the appropriate jumper connections at the
drive determines which select line of the interface activates that
drive.
The fixed disk drive provides a 220/230 ohm termination for a
single ' drive select ' signal. The signal lead that is terminated is
the one that selects the drive based on the position of the drive
select jumpers.
Output Control Signals
The drive control signals are open collector outputs that can sink a
maximum of 40 mA in the active state, with a maximum output
voltage of 0.4 Vdc. When the output is inactive, the collector's
cutoff current is a maximum of 250 microamperes.
-Seek Complete
This signal goes active when the read/write heads settle on the
final track at the end of a seek. Reading or writing is not attempted
when '-Seek Complete' is inactive. The following situations force
1 -Seek Complete' inactive:
• When power-on starts a recalibration sequence because the
read/write heads are not over track 0.
• When less than 5 microseconds have elapsed after the trailing
edge of a step pulse or a series of step pulses.
• If the +5 or +12 Vdc fluctuates or is lost momentarily but
restored.
• If the drive attempts to retry a seek after settling on a track.
August 31, 1984
4 Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
-Seek Complete returns to the active level no later than 100
milliseconds (1 second if a seek retry occurs) after the trailing
edge of the last -Step pulse.
-Track 000
This signal is at an active level when the drive's read/write heads
are at the outermost track.
-Write Fault
This signal means that a condition at the drive is causing improper
operation of the disk. An active level of this signal prevents
further writing and stepping at the drive until drive power is
switched off.
This signal goes active when any of the following conditions
occur:
• Write current exists in the head without ' -Write Gate '
active, or no write current exists in the head with ' -Write
Gate ' active and ' -Drive Selected ' active
• More than one seek retry between Seek commands from the
controller
• A step pulse is received while ' -Write Gate ' is active.
-Index
The drive provides this output signal once each revolution to
indicate the beginning of a track. This signal normally is inactive
and goes active to indicate ' -Index ' . Only the change from
inactive to active is valid (leading edge of the pulse).
-Ready
When this signal and ' -Seek Complete ' are active, the drive is
ready to read, write, or seek, and the I/O signals are valid. An
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive 5
inactive level of this signal prevents all writing and seeking.
' -Ready ' is inactive four times during drive operation:
• At power-up time ' -Ready ' remains inactive until:
- Access recalibration to track is complete.
- Spindle speed is stable within ±0.5% of nominal (10
revolution average).
- Drive self -check is complete.
• Spindle speed deviates ±0.5% of nominal (10 revolution
average).
• ' -Write Fault ' is active.
• DC voltages are out of tolerance.
Data-Transfer Signals
All signals associated with the transfer of data between the drive
and the system are differential (pairs of balanced signals) and are
not multiplexed.
Two pairs of balanced signals are used for the transfer of data:
'-Write Data' and '-Read Data' . The following describes the
data-transfer signals.
MFM Write Data
This is a differential pair that defines signal shifts written on the
track. When '+ MFM Write Data 1 goes more positive than
1 -MFM Write Data ' , flux reverses on the track, provided that
1 -Write Gate ' is active. The system drives ' -MFM Write Data '
to an active level ( ' -MFM Write Data ' more negative than
1 +MFM Write Data ' ) when in the read mode.
August 31, 1984
6 Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
To ensure data integrity, the controller applies a
write-precompensation of ± 12 nanoseconds to all write data on
cylinders 300 and greater.
MFM Read Data
Read data is sent to the system through the differential pair of
MFM Read Data lines. When ' +MFM Read Data ' goes more
positive than ' -MFM Read Data ' , flux reverses on the track of
the selected head.
Overlapped Seek
The drive supports overlapped-seek operations. An overlapped
seek occurs when the drive is deselected 20 microseconds after
the last step pulse is sent. Another drive is then selected, and the
'-Step' and '-Direction In' signals are set by the operation
desired. The controller provides at least 100 nanoseconds of hold
time on '-Step 1 and '-Direction In' after '-Drive Select' is
deactivated.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
Specifications
The following figures list the internal and performance
specifications of this drive.
Rotational speed
Cylinders
R/W Heads
Index
3573 rpm±0.5%
615 + Landing Zone
4
1
Internal Specifications
Formatted Capacity
20Mb
Bytes/Sector
512
Sectors/Track
17
Transfer Rate
5M Bits/Second
Access Time
Track-to-Track
2 ms
Average
40 ms
Maximum
85 ms
Settling
12 ms
Average Latency
8.4 ms
Track Density
750 TPI
Performance Specifications
8 Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
August 31, 1984
>
e
c
00
©
©
is
©
S
D
3.
o
oro
CTQ
3
20MB Fixed Disk Drive (Sheet 1 of 4)
i lit: ;i
? I, ** :: ss
O
CM
0)
(0
>
(ft
Q
T3
0)
X
il
CD
s
o
CM
10 Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
August 31, 1984
>
e
c
3P
s
I
o
o
i
H
o
x
»
00
20MB Fixed Disk Drive (Sheet 3 of 4)
i
H
©
O
«<
»
QTQ
e
00
20MB Fixed Disk Drive (Sheet 4 of 4)
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal
Computer AT 30MB
Fixed Disk Drive
August 15, 1985
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1985
Notes:
August 15, 1985
) Copyright IBM Coip. 1985
Contents
Description 1
Interfaces 1
Control Input Signals 2
Output Control Signals 4
Data-Transfer Signals 6
Overlapped Seek 7
Specifications 9
Logic Diagrams 10
August 15, 1985
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1985 Mi
Notes:
August 15, 1985
iy © Copyright IBM Corp. 1985
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT 30MB Fixed Disk Drive is a
direct-access device that can store up to 30M of formatted data.
The average access time is 40 milliseconds using a servo
positioner.
Interfaces
The interfaces of this drive are divided into three categories:
control, data transfer, and dc power.
The control interface is a 34-pin printed circuit board (PCB) edge
connector. The signals and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name
S i gnal P i n
Ground Pin
-Head select 3
2
1
-Head select 2
k
3
-Wr i te gate
6
5
-Seek complete
8
7
-Track 000
10
9
-Write fault
12
11
-Head select
14
13
Reserved
16
15
-Head select 1
18
17
- 1 ndex
20
19
-Ready
22
21
-Step
2k
23
-Drive select
26
25
-Drive select 1
28
27
-Drive select 2
30
29
-Dr i ve select 3
32
31
-Direction in
34
33
Control Interface
August 15, 1985
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1985
30MB Fixed Disk Drive 1
The data transfer interface is a 20-pin PCB connector. The
signals and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name
S ignal P in
-Drive Selected
1
+MFM Write Data
13
-MFM Write Data
)k
+MFM Read Data
17
-MFM Read Data
18
Grounds
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11,
12, 15, 16, IS, 20
Reserved
3, 5, 7, 9
Data-Transfer Interface
The dc power interface is a 4-pin PCB connector. The signals
and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name
Pin
+ 12 Vdc
1
+12 Vdc Return
2
+5 Vdc Return
3
+5 Vdc
4
DC Power Interface
Control Input Signals
The control input signals are of two types: those that are
multiplexed in a multiple drive system, and those intended to do
the multiplexing. These input signals have the following
specifications.
Active: 0.0 to 0.4 Vdc at 40 mA
Inactive: 2.5 to 5.25 Vdc at mA
2 30MB Fixed Disk Drive
August 15, 1985
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1985
The following are descriptions of the control input signals.
-Write Gate
The active level of this signal allows data to be written on the
disk. The inactive level allows data to be read from the disk, and
allows the step pulse to move the heads.
-Head Select 0, 1, 2, and 3
These four signals enable the selection of each read/write head in
a binary-coded sequence. The ' -head select ' signal is the least
significant. Heads are numbered through 15. When all
head-select signals are inactive, head is selected.
-Direction In
This signal defines the direction the read/write heads move when
' -step ' is pulsed. An inactive level defines the direction as out,
and if a pulse is applied to ' -step, ' the read/ write heads move
away from the center of the disk. An active level defines the
direction as in, and the read/ write heads move toward the center
of the disk.
-Step
This signal causes the read/ write heads to move in the direction
defined by the ' -direction in ' signal. The motion starts when the
1 -step ' signal changes from active to inactive (the trailing edge of
this signal pulse). Any change in ' -direction in ' is made at least
100 nanoseconds before the leading edge of the step pulse. This
drive supports two methods of stepping or seeking:
Slow Seek The read/write heads move at the rate of
incoming step pulses. The minimum time
between successive steps is 3 milliseconds and
the minimum pulse width is 2 microseconds.
August 15, 1985
© Copyright ibm Corp. 1 985 30MB Fixed Disk Drive 3
Buffered Seek The adapter's controller may burst step pulses to
the drive until the time after the last pulse
exceeds 200 microseconds or the maximum
number of step pulses is received ( 1 for each
track). The drive starts motion of the heads
after receiving the first step pulse. Step pulses
are sent to the drive every 35 microseconds.
-Drive Select Signals 0, 1, 2, and 3
When one of these signals is active, it connects that drive to the
control lines. Making the appropriate jumper connections at the
drive determines which select line of the interface activates that
drive.
The fixed disk drive provides a 220/230 ohm termination for a
single ' -drive select ' signal. The signal lead that is terminated
selects the drive based on the position of the drive select jumpers.
Output Control Signals
The drive control signals are open collector outputs which can
sink a maximum of 40 mA in the active state, with a maximum
output voltage of 0.4 Vdc. When the output is in the inactive
state, the collector's cutoff current is a maximum of 250
microamperes.
-Seek Complete
This signal goes active when the read/ write heads settle on the
final track at the end of a seek. Reading or writing is not
attempted when ' -seek complete ' is inactive. The following
situations force ' -seek complete ' inactive:
• When power-on starts a recalibration sequence because the
read/write heads are not over track
• When less than 2 microseconds have elapsed after the leading
edge of a step pulse or a series of step pulses
August 15, 1985
4 30MB Fixed Disk Drive © copyright ibm Corp. 1985
• If the +5 or + 12 Vdc fluctuates or is lost momentarily but
restored
• If the drive attempts to retry a seek after settling on a track
The ' -seek complete ' signal returns to the active level no later
than 100 milliseconds (1 second if a seek retry occurs) after the
trailing edge of the last step pulse.
-Track 000
This signal is at an active level when the drive's read/ write heads
are at the outermost track.
-Write Fault
This signal means that a condition at the drive is causing improper
operation of the disk. An active level of this signal prevents
further writing and stepping at the drive until drive power is
switched off.
This signal goes active when any of the following conditions
occur:
• Write current exists in the head without ' -write gate ' active,
or no write current exists in the head with ' -write gate '
active and ' -drive select ' active
• More than one seek retry between Seek commands from the
controller
• A step pulse is received while ' -write gate ' is active
• An off track condition is detected while ' -write gate ' is
active
• The ' -write gate ' signal is active when write is disabled by
the drive electronics
August 15, 1985
© copyright ibm Corp. 1985 30MB Fixed Disk Drive 5
-Index
The drive provides this output signal once each revolution to
indicate the beginning of a track. This signal normally is inactive
and goes active to indicate an index. Only the change from
inactive to active is valid (leading edge of the pulse).
-Ready
When this signal and ' -seek complete ' are active, the drive is
ready to read, write, or seek, and the I/O signals are valid. An
inactive level of this signal prevents all writing and seeking.
The ' -ready ' signal is inactive four times during drive operation:
• At power-up time, '-ready' remains inactive until:
- Access recalibration to track is complete.
- Spindle speed is stable within ±0.25% of nominal (10
revolution average).
- Drive self -check is complete.
• Spindle speed deviates ±0.5% of nominal (10 revolution
average).
• The ' -write fault ' signal is active.
• DC voltages are out of tolerance.
Data-Transfer Signals
All signals associated with the transfer of data between the drive
and the system are differential (pairs of balanced signals) and are
not multiplexed.
Two pairs of balanced signals are used for the transfer of data:
' write data ' and ' read data. ' The following describes the
data-transfer signals.
August 15, 1985
6 30MB Fixed Disk Drive © copyright ibm Corp. 1985
MFM Write Data
This is a differential pair that defines signal shifts written on the
track. When '+ MFM write data' goes more positive than
' -MFM write data, ' flux reverses on the track, provided that
' -write gate ' is active. The system drives ' -MFM write data ' to
an active level ( ' -MFM write data ' more negative than ' +MFM
write data ' ) when in the read mode.
MFM Read Data
Read data is sent to the system through the differential pair of
' MFM read data ' lines. When ' + MFM read data* goes more
positive than ' -MFM read data, ' flux reverses on the track of the
selected head.
Overlapped Seek
The drive supports overlapped-seek operations. An overlapped
seek occurs when the drive is deselected 20 microseconds after
the last step pulse is sent. Another drive is then selected, and the
1 -step ' and ' -direction in ' signals are set by the operation
desired. The controller provides at least 100 nanoseconds of hold
time on ' -step ' and ' -direction in ' after ' -drive select ' is
deactivated.
August 15, 1985
© copyright ibm Corp. 1985 30MB Fixed Disk Drive 7
Notes:
August 15, 1985
8 30MB Fixed Disk Drive © copyright ibm Corp. 1985
Specifications
The internal specifications of this drive are listed in the BIOS
Fixed Disk Parameter Table, under "Real-Time Clock/CMOS
RAM Information" in Section 1 of the IBM Personal Computer AT
Technical Reference manual. The fixed disk type is on the defect
label on the drive.
August 15, 1985
© copyright ibm Corp. 1985 30MB Fixed Disk Drive 9
o
■53
a
O
o
@
n
o
►
3.
e
s
3
w
^
3
h*
n
C*
o
V*
•3
h*
H-
V©
vo
00
en
Ul
(SH. 16) h
(SH. 16) h
H (SH. 14)
(SH. 14) |-
R24-3
10K
(SH. 13) h
R24-1
10K
— V\A»—
-r R61-
3.3K
I vV/Vc
(SH. 7) \-
-ENBL ALIAS FLTR
r.
— ^C47
2.94K | 5
— vw
R25
7.87K
U3-2
LF347
7
H (SH. 2)
H (SH. 15)
H (SH. 2)
39000pF T
i \C 1
VL
KEY:
4- digital ground
Vl low level analog ground
Vh high level analog ground
^7 frame ground
©
g
cro
a
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 1 of 18)
© >
o
a
»
a.
a
IF
o
+CUR SNS OUT
(SH. 7) |-j
(SH. 7) I-
(SH. 7) | M'C(B)BUSB3
(SH. 7) (.
MIC(B)BUS B4
(SH ' MIC(B)BUSB6
(SH ' 7) | MIC(B)BUSB7
+5V R104
J 10K
+C0MP CLK1.5MHZ
(SH. 5) ^_
(SH. 7) (_
(SH.7)|_
(SH. 7) |_
(SH. 1)|_
(SH. 7) |_
+H PR AMP OT
+5V
(SH. 7) |-
Jk
+12V +5V
Jg5_Je7,
'" .00
|e «
1>L.
UTT
1000pF ^f
R83 +6V
5.6K J
.15/i.F
lOOOpF
— )|—
CI 7 +6V
2700pF T
—It— I
H (SH. 13)
-P08 1/4TBK | (SH. .3)
-NEG1/4TRK , (g|) , 3)
H^
R45 +12V
24K J
+6V
T
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 2 of 18)
Si
o
05
CL
2.
+INTERFACE ENBL. ,
@
o
<g! do
B I
O VI
o ^*
8 <*
<SH. 11) (-
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 3 of 18)
® >
o ore*
©
CO
O-
(SH. 2) (-
(SH. 3) h
+VCM DRV IN
+ POWER GOOD
(SH. 3)|-
(SH. 3)|—
^7406
4>«_
^U9-2
J^
. +CUR SNS OUT
U>
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 4 of 18)
o
CO
O
2.
o
ci3' (JO
,_,
V5
w
«■*-
S
»_*
n
Ul
o
3
H*
H-
vo
^o
00
Oi
</l
(SH. 13)
(SH. 6)
(SH. 6)
(SH. 6)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 8)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 6)
(SH. 11)
(SH. 11)
(SH. 11)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 13)
(SH. 13)
(SH. 13)
(SH. 13)
(SH. 13)
(SH. 16)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 16)
(SH. 13)
-TGLDIFTRKLTH
! -WRITE(A)
G5
-READ(A)
JS
+TP1
J7
-WRITE(B)
J2
-READ(B)
J4
MIC(B)BUS B6
C9
+ZER0 EST
A5
+SEEK0UT
A1
MIC(B)BUS B5
J8
+T0CLK
H2
+SETL/TRKF0L
C2
+5V
E3J 07 1 E7 j
U13
PIX02
GOLF
MODULE
1614487
I
+S1 OUT
JS
+S2 0UT
F8
+S3 OUT
H8
+DRVSEL(GF)
B9
+HDSL0
B8
+HDSL1
B7
+ HDSL2
C7
-P0S .25 TRK LTH
D2
-NEG .25 TRK LTH
B2
-P0S .5 TRK LTH
E2
-NEG .5 TRK LTH
HI
+PL0 GATE LTH
B6
+SERV0 CLK 2
A9
+WRITE GATE
H9
-WRITE FAULT
A8
AE ERROR
G9
. +0N TRK LTH
C3
+AMPLIFY VEL
CI
-OFF TRACK
G3
+ALE(B) LTH
B5
+STEP
A7
+MIC LIN REG
+ INDEX GATED
+A COIL P0S
+B COIL P0S
-B COIL NEG
+ INDEX GATED
+C0MP CLK1.5MHZ
+SETUP CLK
H (SH. 7)
H(SH. 11)
H (SH. 2)
H (SH. 7)
-MSH.11)
H (SH. 6)
-MSH.7)
H (SH. 2)
H(SH. 2)
-MSH.12)
A (SH. 2)
H (SH. 2)
H (SH. 2)
H (SH. 2)
H (SH. 2)
H (SH. 2)
7)
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 5 of 18)
(n)
^
o
c
o
(W
"T3
S
ft
t/>
%
p-k
h*
w
C7I
£
^
h*
(J
SO
3
00
Ul
oo
©
OS
a 1
o
J1/J2
CABLE
INTERLOCK
(SH. 5)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 11)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 7)
-FAULT ERROR
-WRITE INHIBIT
Oikr
+WRITE GATE
*^U25-
R80-1 -r
| iF |
+SEEK COMPLETE ,
H(SH. 11)
+WRITE FAULT,
+SPINDLE DR1
+SPINDLE DR3
+SPINDLE DR4
(SH. 10)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 3)
(SH. 3)
(SH. 3)
(SH. 3)
(SH. 11)
-HSH.7)
H (SH. 5)
H (SH. 11)
H (SH. 3)
H (SH. 5)
H (SH. 5)
VL
u%
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 6 of 18)
w
o
se-
ft
o
,_,
V5
w
<■*-
S
h^
o
Ol
o
•3
h-±
h-
V©
v©
00
Ul
c/1
(SH 10)1 +WRITEGATE
MIC(B)BUS B0
£11' 5)' 1 ~ GUARD BAND
MIC(B)BUS B1
' +MICLINREG
MIC(B)BUS B2
J H ' +TXA-RXB
MIC(B)BUS B3
SH6 +busy
MIC(B)BUS B4
Ish'S i - DIFTRKTYP
MIC(B)BUS B5
(SH-.) -CMPL(MICB)
MIC(B)BUS B6
MIC(B)BUS B7
19
U15
MICRO B
30
+B ALE ,
39
MIC(B)BUS B0
r~
18
38
M!C(B)BUS B1
37
MIC(B)BUS B2
(SH B) | +12 MHZ
36
MIC(B)BUS B3
31
35
MIC(B)BUS B4
34
MIC(B)BUS B5
33
MIC(B)BUS B6 j
jr
9
32
r
MIC(B)BUS B7 j
1
MIC(B)BUS B6 |
(SH 9) | +RESET
2
MIC(B)BUS B5 J
+5V
L_
40
3
+SETL/TRKF0L
4
T
5
6
-ENBL ALIAS FLTR ,
7
-TGLDIFTRK j
8
+TRACK '
20
21
+ZER0 EST j
22
1
+ZER0 EST ,
23
-SAM EST VEL j
r
24
-SAM EST BIA
25
-SAM EST POS .
26
-1X
27
+H PR AMP 0T
28
-ENABLE CTR
10
+TRACK !
11
+TXB-RXA !
12
i3r\
12^ _ 3|\^„ 4
-AMPLIFY VEL .
13
^25-4" +5V '
' l>^U18-2
7414
+AMPLIFYVEL .
14
7407
15
R48-1 ~J
16
IK
-WRITE(B) |
17
-READ(B) 1
-TRK INTRPT
sjy& R44 ; 3 "
" +5V
+RETRACT ,
V.
1K
t
7407
(SH. 12)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 13)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 5)
(SH. 5)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 12)
(SH. 11)
(SH. 5)
(SH. 1)
(SH. 13)
(SH. 10)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 5)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 6)
(SH. 6)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 5)
(SH. 11)
(SH. 5)
(SH. 5)
(SH. 4)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 11)
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 7 of 18)
<G>
>
n
e
o
(W
^
e
(/}
qo.
^
h^
W
Ul
K
h^
(J
vo
3
00
o
CO
a.
O
o
24.0 MHZ-XTL
L
+5V
Js
T
R48-2
1K
— -wv, —
1 R96
8 100
-LC38
"^OOpF
_k
U23-1
74LS74
1
C43
56pF
^ 1191
74LS04
U21-2
+12 MHZ
U29-2
74LS08
74LS04
U21-1
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 8 of 18)
+T0 CLK
U29-3
74LS08
\ (SH. 6)
I (SH. 7)
\ (SH. 5)
H (SH. 5)
-| (SH. 13)
00
o
a
&
®
n
«
►
*<
e
£
e
|_4
c/>
dd
^*-
£
H*
n
(/»
o
•3
H*
►_
vo
VO
00
Ul
</l
(SH. 15) h
(SH. 3) [
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 9 of 18)
@ >
f £
o
o
s
00
a.
16-
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 10 of 18)
■©
o
w
o-
3.
@
o
-8
►
s
£
e
C/i
w
<-*
s
h^
n
<^l
o
-3
^
H^
Vfi>
vo
00
LH
Ol
+AMPLIFYVEL
, +SETL/TRKFOL
(SH. 5)h
(SH.5)|-
+VCM DRV IN
+MIC LIN REG
R64-2 +5V
1JK J
R64-1 +5V
1.0K J
=H(SH.1)
-)(SH. 15)
I,
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 11 of 18)
@ >
o (JO
?- ^
cc
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 5)
MIC(B)BUS B7
MIC(B)BUS B6
MIC(B)BUS B5
MiC(B)BUS B4
MIC(B)BUS B3
MIC(B)BUS B2
MIC(B)BUS B1
MIC(B)BUS BO
iu
U16
74LS374
+ENABLE NOTCH
-WRITE INHIBIT
+DEM0 GN B3
+DEM0 GN B2
+DEM0 GN B1
+DEM0 GN BO
H(SH. 14)
H(SH. 5)
H(SH.B)
H(SH. 5)
H(SH. 6)
H(SH. 16)
H(SH. 16)
H(SH. 16)
H(SH. 16)
©
w
R*
(SH.5))-
(SH.6)h
R44-2
IK
+5V
+SEEK COMPLETE
U23-2
74LS74
T
+5V
U29-1
14 74SLS08
3
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 12 of 18)
\ (SH. 10)
N>
Si
o
w
a.
7?
o
o
^ c
qS, (IQ
o ^
(SH. 7)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 7)
(SH. 8)
(SH.17)F
-TGLDIFTRK
-POS .5 TRK
-NEG .5 TRK
+0N TRACK
-POS 1/4 TRK
-NEG 1/4 TRK
+B ALE
+T1 CLK
+GATE 1
+5V
U24
74LS374
-TGLDIFTRKLTH
-POS .5 TRK LTH
-NEG .5 TRK LTH
+0N TRK LTH
-POS .25 TRK LTH
-NEG .25 TRK LTH
+ALE(B) LTH
+PL0 GATE LTH
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 13 of 18)
H (SH. 5)
H (SH. 5)
-KSH.5)
H (SH. 5)
H (SH. 5)
-|(SH.5)
H (SH. 5)
-|(SH.5)
o oro
©
D
+ENABLE NOTCH
H (SH. 1)
Si
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 14 of 18)
O
B
ft
o-
7?
<
(SH. 10) |-
l-DV
IR47-2 1 8r v
590
+5V
; R95
(SH. 10) h
+WRITE GATE
+5V
[ R97
O 1
-WRITE GATE AE7
U22-2
7426
R62-1
560
I R62-2
F10K
+RD/-WRT SEL TR
H(SH. 16)
U22-1
7426
®
n
o *
+6V
STRESS CONNECTOR
(SH. 1)|-
(SH. 11) |-
(SH. 16) |-
(SH. 16) |-
C40B00 ,
C40A90 c
C40A80 (
C40A70
C40A60 „
C40A50 .
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 15 of 18)
@ >■
e
"3
I
©
*1
a*
a.
a
ft
(SH 10) ■ +WRITEGATE
J2-13 o
+MFM WT DATA
(SH. 15) |-
-WRITE GATE AE7
+MFM RO DATA
(SH. 3) h
(SH. 5) \-
(SH. 5) h
(SH. 5) h
(SH. 17) h
(SH. 17) h
+DEM0 GN BO
(SH. 12) h
(SH. 12) h
(SH.2) h
(SH. 15) h
+DEM0 GN B1
+DEM0 GN B2
+DEM0 GN B3
+C0N REF9.5V
Z
A23
A24
+SERV0 CLK 2
+RD/-WRT SEL TR
if^
I (SH. 5)
-| (SH. 1)
-\ (SH. 15)
-MFM WT DATA
-MFM RD DATA
SERVO AGC OUTPUT
] (SH. 17)
VL
17 -r +6V
B20
B21
1
H (SH. 5)
H (SH. 1)
H (SH. 15)
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 16 of 18)
©
00
3.
@
(SH. 16)|-
^(SH. 13)
-|(SH. 16)
USH- 16)
i(SH. 11)
era" QTQ
sr c
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 17 of 18)
©
f
3
o
o
•3
</>
Ui
SO
00
©
00
CL
£
«!
<&
+ 12V
+12V
-C11
^470/^
I
VH
C27
20.0jLtF
+6V
-L-C30
* 20.0piF
+6V
VL
C33
'20.0/xF
+5V
4- C35
20.0/xF
+5V
VL
VL
. C36
' 20.0/xF
+5V
J-C28
v 20.0ju,F
--4
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 18 of 18)
Notes:
August 15, 1985
28 30MB Fixed Disk Drive © Copyright IBM Corp. 1 985
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM 64/256KB Memory
Expansion Option
and
64KB Memory
Module Kit
6361488
Contents
Description 1
Switch-Configurable Start Address 2
Operating Characteristics 3
Specifications 5
Logic Diagrams 7
ill
IV
Description
The 64KB Memory Module Kit and the 64/25 6KB Memory
Expansion Option are available for the IBM Personal Computer
family of products. Depending upon the amount of memory
currently installed on the system board, memory module kits can
be added to provide a maximum of 256KB of RAM without using
any of the system unit expansion slots for a memory expansion
option. The system board must be populated to the maximum
256KB of RAM before a 64/256KB Memory Expansion Option
can be installed.
The IBM 64/25 6KB Memory Expansion Option has four banks
of nine pluggable sockets. Each bank will accept a 64KB
Memory Module Kit, consisting of 9 (64K by 1) modules with
16-pin industry-standard parts. The base 64/25 6K expansion
option comes with modules installed in bank 0, providing 64K of
memory. The kits must be installed sequentially into banks 1, 2,
and 3. The following chart shows how the 64KB Memory
Module Kit can be installed on the system board and the
64/25 6KB Memory Expansion Option.
Minimum
Memory
Maximum
Memory
Number of
64K Memory
Module Kits
Memory
Module
Type
64/256K
System Board
64K
256K
1,2, or 3
64K by 1 Bit,
16 pin
64/256K
Memory Option
64K
256K
1, 2, or 3
64K by 1 Bit,
16 pin
In addition to the memory modules, the memory expansion option
contains the following circuits: bus buffering, dynamic memory
timing generation, address multiplexing, and card-select decode
logic.
Dynamic-memory refresh timing and address generation are
functions that are performed by the system board and made
available in the I/O channel for all devices.
Memory Expansion Options 1
The 64/25 6KB Memory Expansion Option is parity checked. If a
parity error is detected, a latch is set and an I/O 'channel check'
line is activated, indicating an error to the microprocessor.
To allow the system unit to address the expanded memory
provided by the 64KB Memory Module Kit or the 64/25 6K
Memory Expansion Option, refer to the Guide to Operations
manual for the proper memory-expansion-option switch settings.
Svritch-Configurable Start Address
The 64/25 6KB Memory Expansion Option must be configured to
reside at a sequential 64K memory address boundary within the
system address space. This is done by setting dual-in-line
package (DIP) switches on the option. The 64/25 6KB expansion
option has a small DIP module containing eight switches. The
switches are used to set the card start address as follows:
Number
64/256K Options
1
ON: A19 = 0;OFF: A19=1
2
ON:A18 = 0;OFF:A18=1
3
ON: A17 = 0;OFF: A17=1
4
ON: A16 = 0;OFF: A16=1
5
ON: Select 64K
6
ON: Select 128K
7
ON: Select 192K
8
ON: Select 256K
DIP Module Start Address
2 Memory Expansion Options
The following method can be used to determine the switch settings for the
64/256K memory expansion option.
Starting Address = xxxK
= Decimal value
64K IxxxK
Convert decimal value to binary
Bit 3 2 1
Bit value ..8421
Switch
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
jQOQQQOQQ
Amount of memory
installed on option
256K
192K (on = logical 1)
128K
64K
bit
1
2 (off = logical 1)
3
Operating Characteristics
The system board operates at a frequency of 4.77 MHz, which
results in a clock cycle of 210 ns.
Normally four clock cycles are required for a bus cycle so that an
840-ns memory cycle time is achieved. Memory-write and
memory-read cycles both take four clock cycles, or 840 ns.
Memory Expansion Options 3
Access and cycle times for memory used on the 64/256 Memory
Expansion Option are:
64K by 1 Bit
Access
Cycle
200 ns
345 ns
The 64K by 1 modules require only one voltage level of +5 Vdc,
and require 128 refresh cycles every 2 ms. Absolute maximum
access times are:
64K by 1 Bit
From RAS
From CAS
200 ns
115ns
4 Memory Expansion Options
Specifications
64K by 1 Bit Module
Pin
(used on 64/256K option
and 64/256K
system board)
1
N/C
2
Data In**
3
-Write
4
-RAS
5
AO
6
A2
7
A1
8
-5Vdc
9
A7
10
A5
11
A4
12
A3
13
A6
14
Data Out * *
15
-CAS
16
GND
17
*
18
*
*64K by 1 bit modules have 16 pins.
* *Data In and Data Out are tied
together on Data Bits 0-7
(three state bus).
Memory Module Pin Configuration
Memory Expansion Options 5
6 Memory Expansion Options
3
©
O
3
(2) CAS TIMING
(2) RAS TIMING
o
(FQ
3
(ft
64/256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 1 of 4)
00
«
s
©
•a
I
§
I-
o
s*
64/256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 2 of 4)
B
s
5*
O
o
(2) DO
(2) Dl
(2) D2
(2) D3
(2) D4
(2) OS
(2) D6
(2) D7
'/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
64/256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 3 of 4)
3
3
5"
D
©
CtO B03
11*1111111111 — rr—
II I I 1 1 I I 1 1 II "
T T« T T T T T T T I T I
64-256KB
MEM. CD.
EDGE CONN.
+SV +SV
GND
~rr
iiiiiiiiii*
I I I I I I I I I I il -
T T T I T I T I T I- W.
64/256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 4 of 4)
Personal Computer
IBM 256KB Memory
Expansion Option
6138355
Contents
Description 1
Switch-Configurable Start Address 2
Operating Characteristics 3
Voltage Requirements 4
Specifications 5
Logic Diagrams 7
ill
Notes:
IV
Description
The IBM 256KB Memory Expansion Option is available for the
IBM Personal Computer family of products. The system board
must be populated to the maximum 256KB of RAM before the
IBM 256KB Memory Expansion Option can be installed.
The IBM 256KB Memory Expansion Option has four pluggable
sockets. Each socket will accept a 64KB Memory Module,
consisting of one (64K by 9) 32-pin D RAM Module. The
256KB expansion option comes with all four modules installed
providing 256KB of memory.
In addition to the memory modules, the memory expansion option
contains the following circuits: bus buffering, dynamic memory
timing generation, address repowering, and card-select decode
logic.
Dynamic-memory refresh timing and address generation are
functions that are performed by the system board and made
available in the I/O channel for all devices.
The 256KB Memory Expansion Option is parity checked. If a
parity error is detected, a latch is set and an I/O 'channel check'
line is activated, indicating an error to the microprocessor.
To allow the system unit to address the expanded memory
provided by the IBM 256KB Memory Expansion Option, refer to
the Guide to Operations manual for the proper
memory-expansion-option switch settings.
256KB Memory Expansion Option 1
Switch-Configurable Start Address
The 256KB Memory Expansion Option must be configured to
reside at a sequential 64KB memory address boundary within the
system address space. This is done by setting dual-in-line
package (DIP) switches on the option. The IBM 256KB Memory
Expansion Option has a small DIP module containing eight
switches. The switches are used to set the card start address as
follows:
Number
256KB Options
1
ON:A19=0;OFF:A19=1
2
ON:A18=0;OFF:A18=1
3
ON:A17=0;OFF:A17=1
4
ON:A16=0;OFF:A16=1
5
ON: Select 64KB
6
ON: Select 128KB
7
ON: Select 192KB
8
ON: Select 256KB
DIP Module Start Address
2 256KB Memory Expansion Option
The following method can be used to determine the switch settings for the
256KB memory expansion option.
Starting Address = xxxKB
= Decimal value
64KB xxxKB
Convert decimal value to binary
Bit 3 2 1
Bit value 8 4 2 1
Switch
1
3 4
7 8
tu
bit
1
2 (off = logical 1)
3
Operating Characteristics
The system board operates at a frequency of 4.77 MHz, which
results in a clock cycle of 210 ns.
Normally four clock cycles are required for a bus cycle so that an
840-ns memory cycle time is achieved. Memory-write and
memory-read cycles both take four clock cycles, or 840 ns.
256KB Memory Expansion Option 3
Access and cycle times for memory used on the IBM 256KB
Memory Expansion Option are:
Time.
256KB Card
Access
Cycle
290 ns
840 ns
Access/Cycle Times
Voltage Requirements
The IBM 256KB Memory Expansion card requires 3 voltage
levels: +12Vdc, +5Vdc, and-5Vdc.
4 256KB Memory Expansion Option
Specifications
This is the pin side
i view of the IBM 64KB 32-Pin D RAM Module.
J9 H9 G9 F9 E9 D9 C9 B9
A9
y
Beveled Edge
J8
o o
o o o o
o o
o
/
A8
o
o
J7
o
o
A7
J6
o
o
A6
J5
o
o
A5
J4
o
o
A4
J3
o
A3
J2
o
o
A2
o o
O O
O
o
J1 H1
G1 F1 E1 D1 C1 B1
A1
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
A1
D4
B9
A14
J8
A1
B1
+8.5 Vdc
A2
D3
C9
A09
J7
AO
C1
-2.2 Vdc
A3
D2
D9
A11
J6
A7
D1
D5
A4
D1
E9
A12
J5
A5
E1
D6
A5
DO
F9
A13
J4
A3
F1
D7
A6
CS
G9
RS
J3
A2
G1
D8
A7
DG B
H9
A10
J2
A4
H1
+5 Vdc
A8
DG A
J9
A06
J1
GND
A9
A8
The +8.5, +5 and -
2.2Vdc are develope
d on the
256KB Mei
Tiory
Expansion Adapte
r.
IBM 64KB Memory Module Pin Configuration
256KB Memory Expansion Option 5
Notes:
6 256KB Memory Expansion Option
in
5
o
§
o
a
o
-H>f
1 9>v
-5-Juj^cg-^,
'i HUhk*) 2 -
T *5V
74LS16I — j_ Jtojigjm
as a: 6
7«*LS74
li]kF~| i 7
1 I Ul I
100 NS -#
FW
o
* DACKO P*C
(2)
UQ
(2.3)
o
CD SEL DEC
000 PARITY
♦ X>CMR
(3)
(3)
- SELECT
(2)
♦ SELECT
(2)
SB
**
3
-^
m&-
7>4LS27 74LS04
ioJui^
: T^V^
^ — 4^
256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 1 of 3)
00
ON
i
I
8'
I
- SELECT (1)
+ DACKO PWD ( I )
* SELECT (1)
CD SEL DEC (1,3)
256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 2 of 3)
i
§'
O
BOI
COI
HOI_
MOO
BOl
coi
HOI
JOI
MOD 1
BOI
COI
HOI
JOI
MOD 2
BOI
COI
HOI
JOI
MOD 3
( I ) OOD PARITY
256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 3 of 3)
Notes:
10 256KB Memory Expansion Option
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
128KB Memory
Expansion Option
Contents
Description 1
Memory Cycles 1
I/O Channel Check 1
Addressing 1
Specifications 2
Voltage Tolerances 2
Power Dissipation 2
Temperature Variation 2
Logic Diagrams 3
hi
Notes:
IV
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT 128Kb Memory Expansion
Option has 18 RAM modules (64Kb x 1) for a total capacity of
128Kb.
Memory Cycles
Memory read and write commands require a 1 -wait-state, 3-clock
memory cycle. Data moves as a byte (8 data bits and 1 parity bit)
or as a word (16 data bits and 2 parity bits) and is parity-checked
on the adapter. A parity error causes an I/O channel check
(non-maskable interrupt) to the system.
I/O Channel Check
When the I/O channel check occurs, a non-maskable interrupt
(NMI) results. Bits 6 and 7 of hex address 0061 are the status
bits used to determine the source of the NMI (bit 6 is I/O
channel check, and bit 7 is system board parity check). Writing
to the failing card will clear the status bit.
Addressing
This adapter responds to addresses from hex 080000 to hex
09FFFF.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 128KB Memory Expansion Option 1
Specifications
Voltage Tolerances
The maximum variation of the +5 Vdc is ±5% at the adapter
pins.
Power Dissipation
The +5 Vdc power used by the adapter is a maximum of 5.25
watts, and the maximum current used is 1 ampere.
Temperature Variation
The adapter will operate between 10 and 50 degrees Celsius (50
and 122 degrees Fahrenheit).
August 31, 1984
2 Personal Computer AT 128KB Memory Expansion Option
>
e
QTQ
3P<-
©
5
>
H
00
W
©
i
o
£3
O
53
U>
(SHT6)+LA23 —
(SHT 6) + LA22 —
(SHT6)+LA2I —
(SHT6)+LA20 —
(SHT6)+LAI9 -
(SHT 6)-BREFRESH-
(SHT6)+LAI8 -
(SHT6) + LAI7 -
SHE. 9 + BALE -
i\ DRI\
-%&-
©
(JO
-MEM C5I6 (SHT 6)
&5
; CSO (SHT 2) N^
+ CAS CSO (SHT 2)
^£>-
1 28KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 1 of 7)
©
&
n
©
i
e
<■*
15
00
3
©
i
§
05
© u>
(SHT6) -MEMR -
(SHT6) -MEMW -
(SHT1)+CAS CSO "
(SHT1)+RAS CSO -
(SHT6) +BAO -
(SHT6) -SBHE -
¥>
ALSO 1 *
^UIO
KlIO
l^uio
HO 80 160 200
>
^T}^
;>
>
D*
-ADDR SEL (SHT5)
-RA5 (SHT5)
-CAS OL (SHT 5)
-CAS OH (SHT 5)
- + SBHE (SHT 4)
■ -BAO (SHT 4)
00
1 28KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 2 of 7)
c
GTQ
e
S3 S
» 00
©
s
C
*■*
►
H
00
W
3
o
jo
o
3
o
-a
I
(SHT7) +SO0 -
(SHT 7) +SDI -
(SHT-7) +SD2 -
(SHT 7) +SD3 -
(SHT 7) +SD4 -
(SHT 7) +SDS -
(SHT 7) +SD6 -
(SHT 7) +SD7 -
(SHT 6) +BA0 -
(SHT 6) +SD8 -
(SHT 6) +SD9 -
(SHT6)+SDI0 -
(SHT6)+SDM -
(SHT6)+SDI2 -
(SHT6)+SDI3 -
(SHT6)+SDI4 -
(SHT6J+SDI5 -
(SHT6)-BMEMR
+ MD0 (SHT 4.5)
+ MDI (SHT 4.5)
+ M02 (SHT 4.5)
+ MD3 (SHT 4.5)
+ MD4 (SHT 4.5)
+ MDS (SHT 4,5)
+ MD6 (SHT 4.5)
+ MD7 (SHT 4.5)
«- MD8 (SHT 4.5)
f MD9 (SHT 4.5)
^ M010 (SHT 4.5)
h MOU (SHT 4,5)
f MDI2 (SHT 4.5)
f MDI3 (SHT 4.5)
H MDI4 (SHT 4.5)
h MDIS (SHT 4.5)
-SBHE
+ BA0'
OPERATION
-
-
WORD TRANSFER
-
+
BYTE TRANSFER (SD8-SDIS)
+
-
BYTE TRANSFER (SD0-SD7)
+
+
NOP
1 28KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 3 of 7)
n
o
1
c
a
Is)
00
5
o
i
a ^
© u>
53 h^
00
1 28KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 4 of 7)
C
«~
is
©
i
>
H
00
I
I
s
i
o
(SHT 5) + MDP OUT C
(SHT 3) + MDC
(SHT 3) +MDI
(SHT 3) +MD2
(SHT 3) +M03
(SHT 3) + MOM
(SHT 3) + MD5
(SHT 3) + MD6
(SHT 3) +MD7
(SHT 5)+ MOP OUT 1
(SHT 3)
+ M08
(SHT 3)
+ MD9
(SHT 3)
+ MDIO
(SHT 3)
+ MDII
(SHT 3)
+ MDI2
(SHT 3)
+ MDI3
(SHT 3)
+ Mom
(SHT 3)
+ MDIS
(SHT 2) -BAO-
(SHT 6) -BMEMR -
(SHT1) +CS-
(SHT 2) +SBHE -
(SHT 8)
(SHT 3)
(SHT 7) +RESETDRV
&~
PARITY CHECK
&
PARITY CHECK
+ MDPINI (SHT 5)
PR
D Q
Ui
f
^
"D" LATCH
M^
-I/O CH CK (SHT 7)
1 28KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 5 of 7)
.3?
■i
©
S-
n
o
3
►
H
00
dd
(SHTI)-MEM CS If
-+SD8 (SHT3)
-+SD9 (SHT3)
- + SDIO (SHT 3)
-+SOII (SHT 3)
-+SDI2 (SHT 3)
-+SDI? (SHT 3)
- +SDI4 (SHT 3)
-+SDIS (SHT 3)
-+LA23 (SHTt)
- + LA22 (SHT1)
- + LA2I (SHT1)
- + LA20 (SHT1)
-+LAI9 (SHT1)
- -SBHE (SHT 2.3)
- -MEMR(SHT2)
- -MEMW (SHT 2)
- + LAI8 (SHT1)
- + LAI7 (SHT1)
a
3
©
•3
w
4
§
s. c
a ~
© u>
■53 h*
- 1 - C6-C8
12.C3
cm-cis
IOuF
± cs.
C9.CI3
cm-C4S
CS2
CS8
C47-CSI
WVDC
CS3-CS7
(3 LEADS)
CS9-C66
-BMEMR (SHT 3.4)
-BMEMW (SHT 4.5)
+ BAO (SHT 2.3.5)
-BREFRESH (SHT 1.5)
JH?
00
1 28KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 6 of 7)
c
© ^
& 5
ft*
O
3
H
Is)
00
3
o
g
©*
s
o
a
©
(SHT 4) -I/O CH CK -
1 BIO
I B3I
+ SD0
(SHT 3)
+ 5DI
(SHT 3)
+ SD2
(SHT 3)
+ SD3
(SHT 3)
+ SD4
(SHT 3)
+ SD5
(SHT 3)
+ 5D6
(SHT 3)
+ SD7
(SHT 3)
+ SA0
(SHT 6)
+ SAI
(SHT 5)
+ SA2
(SHT 5)
+ SA3
(SHT 5)
+ SA4
(SHT 5)
+ SAS
(SHT 5)
+ SA6
(SHT 5)
+ SA7
(SHT 5)
+ SA8
(SHT 5)
+ SA9
(SHT 5)
+ SAI0
(SHT 5)
+ SAII
(SHT 5)
+ SAI2
(SHT 5)
+ 5AI3
(SHT 5)
+ SAI4
(SHT 5)
+ SAI5
(SHT 5)
+ SAI6
(SHT 5)
+ SAI7
+ SAI8
+ BALE
(SHT1)
-REFRESH (SHT 6)
+RESET DRV (SHT 4)
1 28KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 7 of 7)
Notes:
August 31, 1984
10 Personal Computer AT 128KB Memory Expansion Option
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
512KB Memory
Expansion Option
Contents
Description 1
Memory Cycles 1
Memory Address Switches 1
I/O Channel Check 3
Specifications 3
Voltage Tolerances 3
Power Dissipation 3
Temperature Variation 3
Logic Diagrams 5
in
Notes:
IV
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT 512Kb Memory Expansion
option has 36 RAM modules (128Kb x 1) for a total capacity of
512Kb.
Memory Cycles
Memory read and write commands require a 1 -wait-state, 3-clock
memory cycle. Data moves as a byte (8 data bits and 1 parity bit)
or as a word (16 data bits and 2 parity bits) and is parity-checked
on the adapter. A parity error causes an I/O channel check
(non-maskable interrupt) to the system.
Memory Address Switches
There are two banks of memory address switches on each
memory adapter. These switches are set to values for the first,
second, third, etc. memory adapter in the system.
The first memory expansion adapter must start at address space
hex 100000. If more than one adapter is installed, no gaps
between memory are allowed. All expansion memory must be
one contiguous block starting at address hex 100000.
The figure on the following page shows the switch settings for
each adapter.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Expansion Option 1
(llllliliSSSSSlfflSllI
IlllliiilSlSlSllll
Switch BankO
Switch Bank 1
Switch Bank Switch Bank 1
1st 51 2KB
Memory
Expansion
Adapter
2nd 51 2KB
Memory
Expansion
Adapter
3rd 51 2KB
Memory
Expansion
Adapter
4th 51 2KB
Memory
Expansion
Adapter
5th 51 2KB
Memory
Expansion
Adapter
12 3 4 5 6 78
fflunnno unnununc
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
sOTunnn nnnuuuna
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
snnunnnnn nnunnana
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
On
Offl
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
mmm nnunuunu
On
Offl
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678
mmm nnuununa
August 31, 1984
2 Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Expansion Option
I/O Channel Check
When the I/O channel check occurs, a non-maskable interrupt
(NMI) results. Bits 6 and 7 of hex address 0061 are the status
bits used to determine the source of the NMI (bit 6 is I/O
channel check, and bit 7 is system board parity check). Writing
to the failing card will clear the status bit.
Specifications
Voltage Tolerances
The maximum variation of the +5 Vdc is ±5% at the adapter
pins.
Power Dissipation
The +5 Vdc power used by the adapter is a maximum of 5.25
watts, and the maximum current used is 1 ampere.
Temperature Variation
The adapter will operate between 10 and 50 degrees Celsius (50
and' 122 degrees Fahrenheit).
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Expansion Option 3
Notes:
August 31, 1984
4 Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Expansion Option
►
(SHT7)+LAI7
e
K)
e
(/>
«-*
*o
u>
h^
(SHT7) +LAI8
©
H*
9
SO
P
00
^
(SHT7) +LA23
o
(SHT7) +LA22
o
(SHT 7) +LA2 1
3
(SHT7) +LA20
T3
(SHT 7) +LA !<) "
C
(SHT 7) BREFRESH
<D
*«
>
H
c*
K>
3
o
i
9
o
©*
9
MEM CSI6 (SHT 6)
RAS CSO (SHT 2)
RAS C5I (SHT 2)
RAS CS2 (SHT 2)
+RAS C53 (SHT 2)
+CAS CSO (SHT 2)
CAS CS1 (SHT 2)
o
CTQ
&2
QTQ
B
51 2 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 1 of 8)
OS
o
3
n
o
S
c
<&
►
H
5
o
W
3
§'►
B c
s=
*u en
ft *+
2 <*>
(SHT 7) -MEMR -
(SHT 7) -MEMW -
(SHT1) +CAS CSO "
(SHT1)+RAS CSO -
(SHT1)+RAS CSI -
(SHT1)+CAS CSI -
(SHT 7) + BA0 -
(SHT 7) -SBHE -
(SHT 1) <-RAS CS 2 -
(SHT1) +RASCS1 -
F00
' — uio
i^uio
W 80 160 200
"VJu^^ -
i£>
^y
D^
ry
7\a
7y>±
51 2 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 2 of 8)
- ADOR SEL (SHT 5)
-RAS (SHT 5)
- -RAS I (SHT 5)
-CAS OL (SHT 5)
-CAS OH (SHT 5)
-CAS IL (SHT 6)
-CAS IH (SHT 6)
- + SBHE (SHT 4)
- -BAO (SHT 4)
- -RAS 2 (SHT 6)
■ -RAS 3 (SHT 6)
c
QTQ
C
<^-
© h*
©
s
>
H
in
2
s
©
s
O
©
(SHT8)+SD0 -
(SHT8)+SDI -
(SHT 8) +SD2 -
(SHT8)+SD3 -
(SHT 8) +SDH -
(SHT8)+SDS -
(SHT 8) +SDfe -
(SHT 8) +SD7 -
(SHT 7) +BA0 -
(SHT 7) +SD8 -
(SHT 7) +SD9 -
(SHT 7) +SDI0 -
(SHT7)+SDII "
(SHT7)+SDI2 "
(SHT7)+SDI3 -
(SHT 7) +SDm -
(SHT7)+SDIS -
(SHT 7) - SBHE-
-+M00 (SHT 4.5.6)
- +MDI (SHT 4.5.6)
-+MD2 (SHT 4.5.6)
-+rt)3 (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MD* (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MOS (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MD6 (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MD7 (SHT 4.5,6)
- + MD8 (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MD9 (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MCMO (SHT 4.5.6)
-+rt>ll (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MDI2 (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MDI3 (SHT 4.5.6)
- + MDIH (SHT 4.5.6)
-+ MOR (SHT 4.5.6)
-SBHE
+ BA0
OPERATION
-
-
WORD TRANSFER
-
+
BYTE TRANSFER (SD8-SDI5)
+
-
BYTE TRANSFER (S00 -SD7)
+
+
NOP
51 2 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 3 of 8)
•1
(0
O
a
&
n
©
s
C
H
en
w
<&
3
©
W
■a
§
Si ^
S" U>
• MOP IN (SHT 5.6)
MDPINI (SHT 5.6)
(SHT 7) -BMEMW
(SHT 3) -C5
(SHT 8) +RESETDRV
-I/O CH CK (SHT 8)
V©
00
4^
51 2 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 4 of 8)
>
c
e
S Hi
IS
©
s
■a
c
^+
3
©
w
© #
9
o
^+
5*
9
(SHT 4) +
MOP IN
(SHT 4) +
MOP IN 1
(SHT 3)
+ MDO
(SHT 3)
+ MDI
(SHT 3)
+ MD2
(SHT 3)
+ MD3
(SHT 3)
+ MDM
(SHT 3)
+ MD5
(SHT 3)
+ MD6
(SHT 3)
+ MD7
(SHT 3)
+ MD8
(SHT 3)
+MD9
(SHT 3)
+ MDIO
(SHT 3)
+ MDII
(SHT 3)
+ MDI2
(SHT 3)
+ MDI3
(SHT 3)
+ MDIM
(SHT 3)
+ MDC5
(SHT 8) <
(SHT 7) -BREFRESH.
(SHT 7) r
(SHT 7) -BMEMW
(SHT 8)
+ SAI
(SHT 8)
+ SA2
(SHT 8)
+ SA3
(SHT 8)
+ SA4
(SHT 8)
+ SA9
(SHT 8)
+SAIO
(SHT 8)
+SAII
(SHT 8)
+SAI2
(SHT 2) ADOR SEL
(SHT 8)
+ SAS
(SHT 8)
+ SA6
(SHT 8)
+ SA7
(SHT 8)
+SAB
(SHT 8)
+SAIt
(SHT 8)
+SAIS
(SHT 8)
♦SA*
(SHT 2) -RAS -
D 7 10... 7 -MAI (
9 12. v ■; -MA2 .
,12 5
2 -MA3
^=L
"JOIN P OUT
"iDIN DOUT
— +MDP OUT (SHT 4.6)
this card provides a choice of two sets a holes
a memory socket can plug into. this card mus
as shown below.
COMPONENT SIDE VIEW
--BMAO (SHT 6)
--BMAI (SHT 6)
--BMA2 (SHT 6)
--BMA3 (SHT 6)
.-BMAH (SHT 6)
-BMAS (SHT 6)
--BMA6 (SHT 6)
--BMA7 (SHT 6)
-^C
[H j DIN DOUT
51 2 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 5 of 8)
*0
©
ft
©
3
•a
H
en
■w
■S
s
©
o c
(SHT3
+ MD0
(SHT3
+ MDI
(SHT3
+ MD2
(SHT3
+ MD3
(SHT3
+ MD4
(SHT3
+HDS
(SHT3
+MD6
(SHT3
+ MD7
(SHT3
+ MD8
(SHT3
+MD9
(SHT3
+ MDI0
(SHT3
+ MDI 1
(SHT3
+ MDI2
(SHT3
+ MDI3
(SHT3
+ MDI4
(SHT3
+ MDIS
(SHT5
-BMAO
(SHT5
-BMA1
(SHT5
-BMA2
(SHT5
-BMA3
(SHT5
-BMA4
(SHT5
-BMA5
(SHT5
-BMA6
(SHT5
-BMA7
(SHT2
-RAS 3
(SHT2
-RAS 2
(SHTZ
-CAS IL
(SHT2
-CAS IH
(SHT7
-BBMEMW
(SHT4
+ MDPIN
(SHT4
+MDP IN 1
(SHT5
+MDFOUT0
(SHT5
+ MDPOUT 1
JJMA6
BMA7
t BMA2
.BHA3
,, MDI0
' [DIN/BOUT
^JDIN/DOUT^
t^
-< WE
~^C RASO
-A:ca?
— CRASl
-^C WE
AdrUsU
^caT
— DIN/DOUT
4^
51 2 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 6 of 8)
e
© ^
S3 \Q
^ °°
©
1
c
>
H
©
m
§
©'
(SHT 8)
(SHT 8)
C4
l
L- C6-C8
CI.C2.C3
>7 WVDC
CI4-CIS
IOuF _[+ C5, C9.CI3
TANTALUM - r - r - CI 6, C40.C46
C4I-C4S
CAP > 7
"C52, CS8
C47-C5I
WVDC
CS3-C57
(3 LEADS)
J
r^
•-SD8
(SHT 3)
^D9
(SHT 3)
•- 5DI0
(SHT 3)
•-SD1I
(SHT 3)
I-S0I2
(SHT 3)
SDH
(SHT 3)
•-S0I4
(SHT 3)
SDIS
(SHT 3)
KLA23
(SHT Z)
LA22
(SHT 2)
LA 2 1
(SHT 2)
LA20
(SHT 2)
LAiq
(SHT 2)
-S8HE (SHT 2.3)
-MEMR (SHT 2)
-MEMW (SHT 2)
LAI8
(SHT1)
LAI 7
(SHT 1)
- -BMEMR (SHT 3.4)
- - BMEMW (SHT 4.5)
-+BA0 (SHT 2.3.5)
- - BREFRESH (SHT 1.5)
--BBMEMW (SHT 6)
©
3
51 2 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 7 of 8)
N>
I
n
©
3
>
H
en
s
o
w
a. >
B are
§r
vo
00
(SHT 4) -I/O CH CK -
- +SDO (SHT 3)
- +SDI (SHT 3)
-+SD2 (SHT 3)
- +SD3 (SHT 3)
- +SD4 (SHT 3)
- +SD5 (SHT 3)
- +SD6 (SHT 3)
- +SD7 (SHT 3)
- +SAO (SHT 7)
- +SAI (SHT 5)
- +SA2 (SHT 5)
- +SA3 (SHT 5)
- + SA4 (SHT 5}
- +SA5 (SHT 5)
- + SA6 (SHT 5)
- +SA7 (SHT 5)
- +SA8 (SHT 5)
- + SA9 (SHT 5)
- + SAIO (SHT 5)
- +SAII (SHT 5)
- + SAI2 (SHT 5)
- + SAI3 (SHT 5)
- + SAW (SHT 5)
- + SAIS (SHT 5)
-+SAI6 (SHT 5)
- + SAI7
- + SAI8
- + BALE (SHT 1)
- -REFRESH (SHT 7)
- +RESET DRV (SHT 4)
512 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 8 of 8)
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer AT®
128KB/640KB Memory
Expansion Option
6183312
March 18, 1986
iv March 18, 1986
Contents
Description 1
Operating Characteristics 2
Memory Address Switches 2
Specifications 3
Logic Diagrams 4
March 18, 1986
Notes:
vi March 18, 1986
Description
The IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER AT® 128KB/640KB
Memory Expansion Option is a variable-size memory adapter
designed to:
• Increase the size of base memory by 128K to allow full 640K
real mode memory addressing
• Increase the size of expansion memory by 512K without using
an additional I/O slot.
The option has two banks of pluggable sockets, Bank
and Bank 1.
Module
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PO 8 9 10 11 12 13 I 1 * 15 P1
/ I—
Bank
Bank 1
Switch
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDD °°°DD »-
DDDDDDDDD DDDdD
I / /■
Memory Module Location
Bank 1 is the 128K bank. It contains eighteen 64K by 1 dynamic
random access memory (DRAM) modules. The 128K is base
memory residing at address hex 80000 through hex 9FFFF. Bank
is the 5 12K bank. This bank may be populated by an IBM
Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Module Kit, consisting of
eighteen 25 6K by 1 DRAM modules. The 512K is expansion
memory residing at an address determined by the option's
dual-inline-package (DIP) switch settings.
March 1 8, 1 986 1 28KB/640KB Memory Expansion Option 1
Operating Characteristics
Memory-read (MEMR) and memory-write (MEMW) operations
require a 1 -wait-state, 3 -clock memory cycle. Data moves as a
byte (8 data bits and 1 parity bit) or as a word (16 data bits and 2
parity bits) and is parity-checked on the adapter.
I/O Channel Check
If a parity error is detected, a latch is set and an I/O 'channel
check' line is activated; the result being a non-maskable interrupt
(NMI) indicating an error to the system unit's microprocessor.
The status bits (I/O channel check and system-board parity
check) determine the source. Writing to the failing option clears
the status bit.
Memory Address Switches
An eight-position DIP module is mounted on the option,
switch assignments are as follows:
Its
Swi tch
Switch Assi
gnments
Number
1
0N:LA23 =
0FF:LA23 = 1
2
0N:LA22 =
0FF:LA22 = 1
3
0N:LA21 =
0FF:LA21 = 1
4
0N:LA20 =
0FF:LA20 = 1
5
0N:LA19 =
0FF:LA19 = 1
6
0N:Bank populated
0FF:Bank not populated
7
ONrBank 1 populated
0FF:Bank 1 not populated
8
ON:Reserved
OFF :Bank 1 memory is 128K
DIP Module Switch Assignments
The first 512K of expansion memory must start at address space
hex 100000. If additional memory expansion options are
installed, no gaps between memory are allowed. AH expansion
memory must be one contiguous block starting at address hex
100000.
2 128KB/640KB Memory Expansion Option March 18, 1986
Specifications
1.^
^ 16
]
2
15
]
3
14
]
k
13
]
5
12
]
6
11
]
7
10
]
8
3
]
Pin
256K by 1 bit
64K by 1 Bit
Module
Modu le
1
A8
N/C
2
Data In *
Data In *
3
-Write
-Write
4
-RAS
-RAS
5
A0
AO
6
A2
A2
7
A1
A1
8
+5 Vdc
+5 Vdc
9
A7
A7
10
A5
A5
11
A4
A4
12
A3
A3
13
A6
A6
14
Data Out *
Data Out
15
-CAS
-CAS
16
GND
GND
* Dal
:a In and Data Out are tie
id together on
i bus)
Da1
:a Bits 0-7 (three state
Memory Module Pin Configuration
March 1 8, 1 986 1 28KB/640KB Memory Expansion Option 3
00
W
\
OS
o
3
o
©'
©
s
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
&Q
as
00
v©
00
On
1 28/640 Memory Card (Sheet 1 of 8)
!
00
V©
00
OS
00
W
\
ON
©
s
©
W
©*
o
o
B
Oi
(SH. 7) -MEMR-
(SH.7) -MEMW-
(SH. 1) +CAS CSO -
(SH. 1) +RAS CSO -
(SH. 1) +CAS CSI -
(SH. 7) +BA0-
(SH.7) -SBHE -
(SH. 1) +RAS CSI
F00
•^1137
^ll?7
TIME DELAY
W 80 1 60 200
:>
rju^y-
"iojino) 1
!!>
i>
u^)>5
L>*
1 28/640 Memory Card (Sheet 2 of 8)
U32
U32
i 3on *
U32
-ADOR SEL (SH.5)
-RAS (SH.5)
— CAS OL (SH.5)
-CAS OH (SH.5)
-CASH (SH.6)
— CAS IH (SH.6)
- +SBHE (SH. 4)
--BA0 (SH.4)
ON
fcs>
00
OS
©
3
©
w
©
o
§
I
oo
(SH.8)+SD0 -
(SH.8)+SDI -
(SH.8)+SD2 -
(SH.8)+SD3 -
(SH. 8) +SD4 -
(SH. I
+ SDS
(SH.8)+SD6 -
(SH. 8) +SD7 -
i7)+SD8 -
f 7)+SD9 -
i.7)+SDI0-
1. 7)+SDII -
i7)+SDI2-
1.7)+S0I3 -
1. 7)+SDIH -
H.7)+SDI5-
(SH.7) -BMEMR
(SH. 1) +CS
+ MD0
(SH. 4,5,6)
+MDI
+ MD2
+ MD3
+ MD4
+ MDS
+ MD6
"
+ MD7
(SH. 4,5,6)
t- MD8 (SH. 4,5,6)
f MDI2
*■ MDI3
+ MDIS (SH. 4,5,6)
BUS GATING
-SBHE
+BA0
OPERATION
-
-
WORD TRANSFER
-
+
BYTE TRANSFER (SD8-SDI5)
+
-
BYTE TRANSFER (SD0-SD7)
+
-
NOP
00
as
1 28/640 Memory Card (Sheet 3 of 8)
00
SO
00
00
o
2
3
I
I
§
©'
B
O
a
§
(SH. 5) +MDP OUT
(SH. 3)
+ MD0
i.
+ MDI
+ MD2
+MDB
+MDH
+MD5
V
+ MD6
(SH.3)
+ MD7
(SH. 5)
+ MDP OUT 1
(SH.3)
+ MD8
+ MD9
+ MDI0
+ MD1I
+ MDI2
+ MDI3
+ MDIH
(SH
• 3)
+ MDIS
(SH. 2) -BA0
(SH.7) -BMEMR
(SH. 1) +CS
(SH. 2) + SBHE
(SH.7) -BMEMW
■MDP INO (SH.5,6)
•MDP IN I (SH.5,6;
-1/0 CH CK (SH.8)
1 28/640 Memory Card (Sheet 4 of 8)
ex
(SH. 3) +MDO
00
w
as
*>
o
W
I
i
12
©*
S
O
*a
a
o
3
s
00
(SH. 7) -8REFRESH
(SH. 7) -BMEMW •
(SH.2) ADOR SEL
(SH.8) + SAS
(SH. 2) -RAS
,12 IS„
rg
^-JDIN DOUtp
-iDIN DOUT
H^
iri^
^H
?t^ 1dIN DOUT
■ + MDP0UT (SH.4,
— +MDP OUT I (SH.4,6)
so
00
1 28/640 Memory Card (Sheet 5 of 8)
I
00
v©
00
On
9
vo
MDP IN
2
JT
14
MDO
2,l4nv?^
,uv
MDI
U33
MD2
2.14. ■■'.-■-. .
U34
M ^
2,m
U3S
U36
MD4
2.m,_. 1".. ,
MDS
U37
U38
MD6
UT
U39
H1D,
MD7
2,14
4 " D6
DIN /D OUT
Al
U4I
A2
A3
AS
A6
A7
A8
WE
RAS
CAS
U40
,MA0
S
U1DT
MAI 7
+IID8
,MA2
6
11109
,MA3
12
MA4 II
II1DII
MAS
10
+ MDI2
,MA6 13
'
MA7
9
(St-
MA8 1
-BMEMW 3_
(SH
-RAS
4 a
-CAS IL
IS.
""
BANK 1
^DP OUT
MAT
MDP OUT 1
MAO
HAS
I """
MAI 7
A2
A3
AS
A7
A8
WE
RAS
CAS
DIN/ D OUT
(SH
"" ""'
MA2 6
U6I
-)
MA3
12
US9
MA4 II
US8
(SH
(SH
(SH
(SH
(SH
(SH
(SH
MAS
10
US7
MA6
13
'' CAj ' H
JSfe
MA7
9
USS
MA8 I
U63
UT
BBMEMW
3 Q
-RAS
M
-CAS IH
is c
MDIS
2.14
MDI4
2.I4L,..
T
MDH
MDI2
2.14
MDII
J4"
DIN/D OUT
MDIO
MD9
MD8
MDP INI
2 |din/do
1 28/640 Memory Card (Sheet 6 of 8)
00
W
\
OS
©
w
i
!
©*
O
a
o
(SH.8) +SA0 -
(SH. 8) -REFRESH -
(SH. 2)
(SH. 2)
-BMEMR (SH. 3,4)
-BMEMW (SH. 4,5)
-BREFRESH (SH. 1,5)
00
so
00
OS
BYPASS CAPS
r
C3-C7
■L- C9-CI6
CI8-C24
_,_ Cl,C2,C8,CI7,
+ C27.C28,
C47-C48
C60
C54-CS9
C6I-C66
(3 LEADS)
^
T
1 28/640 Memory Card (Sheet 7 of 8)
!
00
SO
00
00
W
OS
o
3
©
5*
(SH.4) -I/0CH CK-
+ SD0
(SH. 3)
+ SDI
+ SD2
+ SD3
+ SDH
+ SD5
+ SD6
''
+ SD7
(SH. 3)
+ SA0
(SH.7)
+ SAI
(SH.5)
+ SA2
t,
+ SA3
+ SA>+
+ SA<5
+ SA6
+ SA7
+ SA8
+ 5A9
+ SAI0
+ SAII
+ SAI2
+SA13
+SAI4
+ SAI5
"
+SAlb
(SH. 5)
+SAI7
(SH. 5)
+ SAI8
(SH. 5)
+ BALE
(SH. 1)
-REFRESH (SH.7)
+ RESET DRV (SH.4)
1 28/640 Memory Card (Sheet 8 of 8)
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer AT®
512KB/2MB Memory
Expansion Option
6183310
March 18, 1986
iv March 18, 1986
Contents
Description 1
Operating Characteristics 2
Memory Address Switches 3
Programming 4
Specifications 5
Logic Diagrams 6
March 18, 1986
Notes:
vi March 18, 1986
Description
The IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER AT® 512KB/2MB
Memory Expansion provides 512K of additional random access
memory (RAM) and can be expanded to provide a total of 2M of
additional RAM.
Four 18-socket banks accept 256K-by-l dynamic RAM (DRAM)
modules. Bank is fully populated. Banks 1, 2, and 3 may be
populated by using three IBM Personal Computer AT 512KB
Memory Module Kits, consisting of eighteen 256K-by-l DRAM
modules each.
Module
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PO 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PI
Bank 3
Bank 2
Bank 1
Bank
-/ /-
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD ',D
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD sag*
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
I—/ /-
Memory Module Location
March 18,1986 51 2KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option 1
Operating Characteristics
Memory-read (MEMR) and memory-write (MEMW) operations
require a 1 -wait-state, 3-clock memory cycle. Data moves as a
byte (8 data bits and 1 parity bit) or as a word (16 data bits and 2
parity bits) and is parity-checked on the adapter.
I/O Channel Check
If a parity error is detected, a latch is set and an f -I/O channel
check 1 line is activated; the result is a non-maskable interrupt
(NMI) indicating an error to the system unit's microprocessor.
The status bits (I/O channel check and system-board parity
check) determine the source. Writing to the failing option clears
the status bit.
2 512KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option March 18, 1986
Memory Address Switches
An eight-switch DIP module is mounted on the memory
expansion option. These switches set the starting address for
each option above the 1M system board RAM. The switch
assignments for the starting address for Bank are as follows:
Switch
Switch Assignments
Number
1
ON:LA23 =
0FF:LA23 = 1
2
0N.-LA22 =
OFF
LA22 = 1
3
0N:LA21 =
OFF
LA21 = 1
4
0N:LA20 =
OFF
LA20 = 1
5
0N:LA19 =
OFF
LA19 = 1
6
Not Used.
7
Not Used.
8
Not Used.
Switch Assignments
The address of the first expansion memory option must start at
address space hex 100000. If additional memory expansion
options or IBM Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Module
Kits are installed, no gaps between memory are allowed. All
expansion memory must be one contiguous block starting at
address hex 100000.
Notes:
1. An expansion option must be fully populated before another
can be installed.
2. In order to determine the total expansion memory installed
check bytes hex (30 & 31) in CMOS RAM.
March 18,1986 51 2KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option 3
Programming
Programs that test for memory by writing and reading until a data
error is detected, must write back to the failing card to clear
possible parity checks. This is required for a partially populated
512KB/2MB Memory Expansion.
4 512KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option March 18, 1986
Specifications
[
1.
^16
]
c
2
15
]
[
3
]k
]
c
4
13
]
c
5
12
]
[
6
11
:
c
7
10
:
[
8
9
:
256 by 1 Bit
Pin
Module
1
A8
2
Data In *
3
-Write
k
-RAS
5
A0
6
A2
7
A1
8
+5 Vdc
9
A7
10
A5
11
A4
12
A3
13
A6
]k
Data Out *
15
-GAS
16
Ground
* Data In and
Data Out are t
ied
together on
Data Bits 0-7
(three state bus) .
Memory Module Pin Configuration
March 18, 1 986 51 2KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option 5
c^
en
s
a
I
I
5*
p
a
©
p
p-
00
(SH. 9) +BBALE
(SH.9)-BREFRESH-
•FAST CSI6 (SH.9!
-CS (SH. 3,4)
(SH.2) +RAS TIMING
00
ON
512KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 1 of 10)
00
00
0\
in
I
I
O
o
(SH. 9) -MEMR-
(SH. 9) -MEMW-
(SH. 1) -CAS0-
(SH.9) +BA0-
2JU89 y— f
'^tT^V-
;^gy°-
Hfg>^-
U83
ALSOH
_4>i
PE 21213
IN U90
HO 80 160 200
iiiy
— 'MIA
^>^-
££>*-
5™> l -
^B^-
3^
^^
RN3
3on
m.„3
RN3
30Q
10 7
RN3
12 S
RN3
30Q
9... 8
RN3
30fl
lb 1
RN3
30fl
IS... 2
512KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 2 of 10)
- A DDR SEL (SH.9)
+ RA5 TIMING (SH. 1)
-CAS0L (SH.5)
-CAS OH (SH.5)
— CASIL (SH.6)
--CAS2L (SH.7)
--CAS2H (SH.7)
--CAS3L (SH.8)
— CAS3H (SH.8)
--BA0 (SH.4)
- +SBHE (SH.4)
00
en
W
BO
»
s
3
I
§
©"
ft.
o
3
2
3
00
(SH.10) +SDO -
(SH. 10) +5DI -
(SH. 10) +SD2 -
(SH. 10) +SD3 -
(SH. 10) +SDH -
(SH.10) +SD5 -
(SH.10) +SD6 -
(SH.10) +S07 -
(SH. 9) +BA0 -
(SH.9) +SD8 -
(SH. 9) +SD9 -
(SH.9) +SDI0 -
(SH.9) +SDII -
(SH.9) +SDI2 -
(SH.9) +SDO -
(SH.9) +SDI4 -
(SH.9) +SDIS -
(SH.9) -SBHE-
(SH.9)-BMEMR
(SH.1) -CS
+ MD0
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MDI
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MD2
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MD3
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MD4
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MDS
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MD6
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MD7
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MD8
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MD9
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MDIO
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MOM
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MDI2
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MDI3
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MDIH
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
+ MDIS
(SH. 4,5,6,7,8)
-SBHE
+ BA0
OPERATION
-
-
WORD TRANSFER
-
+
BYTE TRANSFER (SD8-SDIS)
+
-
BYTE TRANSFER (SDO -SD7)
+
+
NOP
SO
ft
©S
51 2KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 3 of 10)
o
sr
00
00
OS
Ml
00
s
e
I
3
5*
3
(SH. 5) + MDP OUT
(SH. 3)
+ mdo
(SH. 3)
+ MDI
(SH. 3)
+ MD2
(SH. 3)
+ MD3
(SH. 3)
♦mdh
(SH. 3)
+ MDS
(SH. 3)
+ MD6
(SH. 3)
+ MD7
(SH. 9) -BMEMW
(SH.3) -CS
(SH. 1 0) +AESET DRV
■ HDP IN (SH. 5,6,7,8]
MDP IN I (SH. 5,6,7,8)
I/O CH « (SH. 10)
^D
5 1 2KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 4 of 1 0)
en
B
5
©
I
i
s
00
(SH. 9)
(SH.
10)
(SH.
10)
(SH.
10)
+MDP OUT (SH. 4,6,7.8)
00
512KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 5 of 10)
00
Ul
i
3
§
I
(SH.3) +MD0
(SH.3) +MDI
(SH.3) +MD2
(SH.3) + "<>*
(SH.3) +MD4
(SH.3) +MDS
(SH.3) +MD6
(SH.3) +MD7
(SH.3) +MD8
(SH.3) +MD9
(SH.3) +MDI0
(SH.3) +MDII
(SH.3) + MDI2
(SH.3) +MDI3
(SH.3) +MDI4
(SH.3) +M0IS
(SH. 5) MAO
(SH.5) MAI
(SH. 5) MA2
(SH. 5) MA3
(SH. 5) MA4
(SH. 5) MAS
(SH. £
MA6
(SH. 5) MA7
(SH. 5) MA8
(SH. 1) -RAS I "
(SH.2) -CAS IL ~
(SH.2) -CAS IH -
(SH.9) -BMEMW ~
(SH.4) +MDPIN ~
(SH.4) +MDPIN I -
(SH. 5) +MOP OUT -
(SH. 5) +MDP OUT I -
. MDPINO
^[Dli
-^-|DIN/D<
— C WE
A: raTo
J5cCa5
-kA8
-^CWE
-^RATO"
■ArcTs"
i^-DIN/DOUT
^DIN,
^ Hdin/dout
*> I>4 |dIN/D0UT
-^
512KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 6 of 10)
to
3
I
O
o
p
2
SB
(SH.3) +MD0
(SH.3) +MDI
(SH.3) +MD2
(SH.3) +MD3
(SH.3) +MD4
(SH.3) +MD5
(SH.3) +M0 6
(SH.3) +MD7
(SH.3) +MD8
(SH.3) +MD9
(SH.3) +MDI0
(SH.3) +MDII
(SH.3) +MDI2
(SH.3) +MDI3
(SH.3) +MDI4
(SH.3) +MDIS
(SH.5)-BMA0
(SH.5)-BMAI
(SH. 5) -BMA2
(SH. 5) -BMA3
(SH.5)-BMA4
(SH. SJ-BMA 1 ;
(SH.5)-BMAb
(SH.5)-BMA7
(SH.9) -BMA8
(SH.1) -RAS2 "
(SH.2) -CAS2L -
(SH.2) -CAS2H "
(SH.9) -BBMEMW ~
(SH.4) +MDPIN "
(SH. 4) +MDP IN I -
(SH. 5) +MDP OUT -
(SH. 5) + MDP OUT I -
2,l>< jDIN/DOUT
— k WE
— *CRAS0
-^CCA5
-k A8
- ^DIN/POUT
2 ' |L4 |din/do"ut
00
00
as
512KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 7 of 10)
2
o
sr
00
00
03
3
©
I
P
§'
O
O
s
(SH.3) +MD0 -
(SH. 3) +MDI -
(SH.3) + MD2 -
(SH.3) +MD3 -
(SH.3) +MDM -
(SH.3) +M0S -
(SH.3) +HD6 -
(SH.3) +MD7 -
(SH.3) +MD8 -
(SH.3) +MD9 -
(SH.3) +MDI0 -
(SH.3) +MDII
(SH.3) + MDI2 -
(SH.3) +MDI3 —
(SH.3) +MDI4
(SH.3) +MDIS
(SH. 5) -BMA -
(SH.5)-BMAI
(SH. 5) -BMA2 -
(SH. 5) -BMA3
(SH. 5)-BMA4 -
(SH.5)-BMAS
(SH.5)-BMA6
(SH.5)-BMA7
(SH.9) -BMA8
(SH. 1) -RAS 3 -
(SH. 2) -CAS 3L -
(SH. 2) -CAS3H -
(SH. 9) -BBMEMW ~
(SH.4) +MDPIN -
(SH. 4) +MDP IN I -
(SH. 5) +MDP OUT -
(SH. 5) +MDP OUT I -
^-IDIN/DOUT
2|l>4 |DIN/DOUT
■"♦ --'--- ■ U63
■ DIN/D
-^^DIN/DOUT
^DIN/DOUT
2 ,|L * [DIN/BOUT
jPIN/bOU T
- 2 - t ^-|OIN/DOUT
■pIN/DOUT
DIN/DOUT
-^AO
— A2
-^A3
U62
—- C WE
-^C RAS~0
ACA?
US9
US8
US7
use
uss
— CA8
■^CWE
— ^oRaTo"
-i5cfAT
^DIN/DOUT
2,i>4 Idin/dout
-*Efc
5 1 2KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 8 of 1 0)
CERAMIC
CAP
>7 WVDC
r
CH
L - C6-C8
CI0-CI2
CI, C2.C3
cm-cis
+ d, C9.CI3
CI 7
10.0 UF T
t- CI6, CH0.CH6
~C52. CS8
-1 <M> C
(SH. 10) + SAO "
(SH. 10) -REFRESH -
(SH.5) MA8 -
(SH.2) ADDR SEL-
(SH. 10) BALE -
^
00
+ SD8 (SH.3)
+ SD9 (SH.3)
+ SDIO (SH.3)
+ SDII (SH.3)
+ SDI2 (SH.3)
+ SDI3 (SH.3)
+ SDI4 (SH.3)
+ SOI'; (SH.3)
+ LA23 (SH. 1)
+ LA22 (SH. 1)
+ LA2I (SH.1)
+ LA20 (SH.1)
(SH.1)
-MEMR (SH.2)
-MEMW (SH.2)
BMEMR
- - BMEMW
- + BAO
- - BREFRESH
- -BMA8
- -BBMEMW
(SH. 2,3)
(SH. 1,5)
(SH. 7,8)
(SH. 7,8)
(SH. 5)
(SH.1)
00
On
5 1 2KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 9 of 1 0)
&
3
00
00
If*
B
X
m
I
§
o
I
(SH.4) -I/O CHCK-
+ SDO
(SH. 3)
+ SDI
(SH. 3)
+ SD2
(SH. 3)
+ SD3
(SH. 3)
+ SD4
(SH. 3)
+ SDS
(SH. 3)
+ SD6
(SH. 3)
+ SD7
(SH. 3)
+ SAO
(SH. 9)
+ SAI
(SH. 5)
+ SA2
(SH. 5)
+ SA3
(SH. 5)
+ SA4
(SH. 5)
+ SAS
(SH. 5)
+ SA6
(SH. 5)
+ SA7
(SH. 5)
+ SA8
(SH. 5)
+ SA9
(SH. 5)
+ SAIO
(SH. 5)
+ SAII
(SH. 5)
+ SAI2
(SH. 5)
+ SAI1
(SH. 5)
+ SAI4
(SH. 5)
+ SAIS
(SH. 5)
+ SAI6
(SH. 5)
+ SAI7
(SH. 5)
+ SAI8
(SH. 5)
+ AEN
(SH. 1)
+ BALE
(SH. 9)
-REFRESH (SH.9)
+RESET DRV (SH.4)
512KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 10 of 10)
Notes:
16 512KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option March 18, 1986
Notes:
Notes:
The Personal Computer
Hardware Library
Reader's Comment Form
Technical Reference
Options and Adapters 6137804
Your comments assist us in improving the usefulness of our
publication; they are an important part of the input used for
revisions.
IBM may use and distribute any of the information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation
whatever. You may, of course, continue to use the information you
supply.
Please do not use this form for technical questions regarding the
IBM Personal Computer family of products or programs for the
IBM Personal Computer family of products, or for requests for
additional publications; this only delays the response. Instead,
direct your inquiries or request to your authorized IBM Personal
Computer dealer.
Comments:
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 321 BOCA RATON, FLORIDA 33432
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER
SALES & SERVICE
P.O. BOX 1328-C
BOCA RATON, FLORIDA 33432
0J8L) p|OJ
8dBl
aiders ;ou op aseay
adei
Technical Reference
Options and Adapters
Volume 1
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11